SANRAD V-Switch
User Manual
MIG – 002 – 02
August 2004
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited Warranty
SANRAD warrants to the CUSTOMER that the hardware in the V-Switch to
be delivered hereunder shall be free of defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve (12)
months following the date of shipment to the CUSTOMER.
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment
becomes defective by reason of material or workmanship, and the
CUSTOMER immediately notifies SANRAD or SANRAD’s local agent of
such defect, SANRAD or SANRAD’s local agent shall have the option to
choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement part, or b)
request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary
repair at the equipment's location. In the event that SANRAD requests the
return of equipment, each party shall pay one-way shipping costs.
SANRAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the
event that the V-Switch has been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or
improper installation, or if repairs or modifications were made by persons
other than SANRAD's own authorized service personnel, unless such
repairs by others were made with the written consent of SANRAD.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied.
There are no warranties, which extend beyond the face hereof, including,
but not limited to, warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose, and in no event shall SANRAD be liable for consequential
damages.
SANRAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect
damages, including, but not limited to, lost profits from any cause
whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture,
sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the V-Switch, and in no event
shall SANRAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the Product.
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all
warranties which it makes relating to the V-Switch and for ensuring that
replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the said
warranties are satisfactory.
Software components in the V-Switch are provided "as is" and without
warranty of any kind. SANRAD disclaims all warranties including the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
SANRAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or
indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite
of the above, SANRAD shall do its best to provide error-free software
products and shall offer free Software updates during the warranty period
under this Agreement.
SANRAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or
damages resulting from any claims, demands, or actions arising out of or
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
relating to this Agreement and the V-Switch shall not exceed the sum paid to
SANRAD for the purchase of the Product. In no event shall SANRAD be
liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary
damages or lost profits, even if SANRAD has been advised of the possibility
of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the
laws of the State of Israel.
Regulatory Information
FCC-15 User Information
The V-Switch has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the V Switch is operated in a commercial environment. The V Switch
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to the radio communications. Operation of the V Switch in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at the user’s own expense.
Warning per EN 55022
The V-Switch is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product
may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to
take adequate measures.
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Notices
Read and understand the following notices before installing the V-Switch.
The power plug must be accessible at all times because it serves as the main
disconnecting vehicle.
Unplug the V-Switch power cord before performing maintenance procedures.
The V-Switch contains two power supply units. To disconnect the V-Switch
completely, all power supply cords must be unplugged.
Do not touch the power supplies when their power cords are connected. Line
voltages are present within the power supplies when their cords are connected.
The safety cover is an integral part of this product. Do not operate the unit without
the safety cover firmly in place. Operating the unit without the cover in place will
invalidate the safety approvals and pose a risk of fire and electrical hazards.
Blank faceplates and cover panels serve three important functions: they prevent
exposure to hazardous voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain
electromagnetic interference (EMI) shields that might disrupt other equipment; and
they direct flow of cooling air through the chassis. Do not operate the system
unless all cards and faceplates are in place.
This product relies on the building’s wiring for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection.
Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC, 15a U.S. (240 VAC, 10A
international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors).
The V-Switch is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the V-Switch is connected to
earth ground during normal use.
When installing the V-Switch, the ground connection must always be connected first
and disconnected last.
There is a danger of explosion if the motherboard battery is replaced incorrectly.
Replace the battery with the same or an equivalent type as recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of the used battery according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Notes
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SANRAD V-Switch
User Manual
MIG – 002 – 02
August 2004
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to SANRAD. No part
of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without
prior written approval by SANRAD.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how,
trade secrets and other intellectual property or other proprietary rights
relating to this manual and to the StoragePro Management System and any
software components contained therein are proprietary products of
SANRAD protected under international copyright law and shall be and
remain solely with SANRAD.
StoragePro Management System is a registered trademark of SANRAD. No
right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder, and you
agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with
respect to such trademark.
SANRAD is continually striving to provide top-of-the-line products. If you
have questions, comments or require technical assistance, you can contact
SANRAD Technical Support at:
US and Americas: +1- 866-301-8155
International: +972-3-941-1890
China (EMEA, Asia, ROW): +080-0972-0074
Germany: +0-8001-812-946
The Netherlands: +-8000-220-721
TECHSUPPORT@SANRAD.COM
For general information contact SANRAD at the address below or contact
your local distributor.
International Headquarters
SANRAD
U.S. Headquarters
SANRAD, Inc.
32 Ha Barzel
Tel: +1-510 521-2424
Fax: 510 521-2411
Tel Aviv
Tel: 972-3-767-4800
Fax: 972-3-647-4104
Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected]
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited Warranty
SANRAD warrants to the CUSTOMER that the hardware in the V-Switch to
be delivered hereunder shall be free of defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve (12)
months following the date of shipment to the CUSTOMER.
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment
becomes defective by reason of material or workmanship, and the
CUSTOMER immediately notifies SANRAD or SANRAD’s local agent of
such defect, SANRAD or SANRAD’s local agent shall have the option to
choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement part, or b)
request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary
repair at the equipment's location. In the event that SANRAD requests the
return of equipment, each party shall pay one-way shipping costs.
SANRAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the
event that the V-Switch has been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or
improper installation, or if repairs or modifications were made by persons
other than SANRAD's own authorized service personnel, unless such
repairs by others were made with the written consent of SANRAD.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied.
There are no warranties, which extend beyond the face hereof, including,
but not limited to, warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose, and in no event shall SANRAD be liable for consequential
damages.
SANRAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect
damages, including, but not limited to, lost profits from any cause
whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture,
sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the V-Switch, and in no event
shall SANRAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the Product.
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all
warranties which it makes relating to the V-Switch and for ensuring that
replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the said
warranties are satisfactory.
Software components in the V-Switch are provided "as is" and without
warranty of any kind. SANRAD disclaims all warranties including the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
SANRAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or
indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite
of the above, SANRAD shall do its best to provide error-free software
products and shall offer free Software updates during the warranty period
under this Agreement.
SANRAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or
damages resulting from any claims, demands, or actions arising out of or
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
relating to this Agreement and the V-Switch shall not exceed the sum paid to
SANRAD for the purchase of the Product. In no event shall SANRAD be
liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary
damages or lost profits, even if SANRAD has been advised of the possibility
of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the
laws of the State of Israel.
Regulatory Information
FCC-15 User Information
The V-Switch has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the V Switch is operated in a commercial environment. The V Switch
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to the radio communications. Operation of the V Switch in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at the user’s own expense.
Warning per EN 55022
The V-Switch is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product
may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to
take adequate measures.
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Notices
Read and understand the following notices before installing the V-Switch.
The power plug must be accessible at all times because it serves as the main
disconnecting vehicle.
Unplug the V-Switch power cord before performing maintenance procedures.
The V-Switch contains two power supply units. To disconnect the V-Switch
completely, all power supply cords must be unplugged.
Do not touch the power supplies when their power cords are connected. Line
voltages are present within the power supplies when their cords are connected.
The safety cover is an integral part of this product. Do not operate the unit without
the safety cover firmly in place. Operating the unit without the cover in place will
invalidate the safety approvals and pose a risk of fire and electrical hazards.
Blank faceplates and cover panels serve three important functions: they prevent
exposure to hazardous voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain
electromagnetic interference (EMI) shields that might disrupt other equipment; and
they direct flow of cooling air through the chassis. Do not operate the system
unless all cards and faceplates are in place.
This product relies on the building’s wiring for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection.
Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC, 15a U.S. (240 VAC, 10A
international) is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors).
The V-Switch is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the V-Switch is connected to
earth ground during normal use.
When installing the V-Switch, the ground connection must always be connected first
and disconnected last.
There is a danger of explosion if the motherboard battery is replaced incorrectly.
Replace the battery with the same or an equivalent type as recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of the used battery according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Notes
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1: V-SWITCH........................................................................ 15
V-SWITCH OVERVIEW.....................................................................................................16
ORDER OF OPERATIONS .................................................................................................17
MANUAL ORGANIZATION.................................................................................................18
CLI - COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ...................................................................................19
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE ................................................................................................20
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING THE V-SWITCH 2000 .................................. 21
CHASSIS........................................................................................................................22
Front Panel
Back Panel
System Indicator LEDs
22
23
23
SURFACE MOUNTING......................................................................................................25
RACK MOUNTING ...........................................................................................................25
STORAGE PORT CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................27
NETWORK PORT CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................29
CONSOLE PORT CONNECTION.........................................................................................30
POWERING UP ...............................................................................................................30
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLING THE V-SWITCH 3000 .................................. 33
CHASSIS........................................................................................................................34
Front Panel
Back Panel
System Indicator LEDs
34
34
35
SURFACE MOUNTING......................................................................................................36
Table of Contents
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RACK MOUNTING ...........................................................................................................36
STORAGE PORT CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................37
NETWORK PORT CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................39
CONSOLE PORT CONNECTION.........................................................................................40
MANAGEMENT PORT CONNECTION..................................................................................41
LCD..............................................................................................................................42
COMPACT FLASH (CF) SLOT ..........................................................................................42
SCALABILITY PORT ........................................................................................................43
POWERING UP ...............................................................................................................44
CHAPTER 4: V-SWITCH CONFIGURATION........................................... 45
INTRODUCTION TO MANAGING THE V-SWITCH..................................................................46
CONFIGURING THE V-SWITCH 3000 MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS VIA LCD .......................48
CONFIGURING THE MANAGEMENT CONSOLE....................................................................49
INITIALIZING THE V-SWITCH.............................................................................................50
CHANGING MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS .........................................................................52
Changing General Management Parameters
Changing the Telnet Communications Port
Adding an SNMP Manager
52
54
54
55
Adding User Login Profiles
CONFIGURING THE STORAGE PORTS ...............................................................................57
Viewing SCSI Storage Ports and Bus IDs
Setting a SCSI Storage Port Bus ID
Viewing the FC Port Information
Configuring an FC Storage Port
Viewing the V-Switch World Wide Node Name
57
57
58
58
59
CONFIGURING THE NETWORK PORTS ..............................................................................60
Checking the IP Configurations
Removing an IP Address
61
61
DISCOVERING ISCSI TARGETS........................................................................................63
iSCSI Discovery Session
SLP
iSNS
63
63
63
CONFIGURING ISCSI PORTALS .......................................................................................64
Viewing iSCSI Portals
Removing iSCSI Portals
65
65
CONFIGURING IP ROUTING .............................................................................................66
Adding an IP Route
Setting a Default Gateway
Checking IP Routes
Viewing IP Routes
67
67
68
68
68
Removing an IP Route
CHAPTER 5: V-SWITCH CLUSTER CONFIGURATION........................... 71
INTRODUCTION TO V-SWITCH CLUSTERS .........................................................................72
CONFIGURING A V-SWITCH CLUSTER ..............................................................................75
Setting the V-Switch ID
Adding a Neighbor
75
75
8
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with SCSI Storage Devices
Maintaining Cluster Communications
Enabling and Disabling Failover
Further V-Switch Cluster Configurations
Viewing V-Switch Neighbor Details
78
78
79
79
80
MANAGING A CLUSTER...................................................................................................81
CHAPTER 6: VOLUME CONFIGURATION.............................................. 83
INTRODUCTION TO VOLUME CONFIGURATION...................................................................84
IDENTIFYING AVAILABLE STORAGE DEVICES....................................................................85
CREATING A TRANSPARENT VOLUME ..............................................................................88
CREATING A SUBDISK (LUN CARVING) ...........................................................................90
CREATING A SIMPLE VOLUME .........................................................................................93
CREATING A CONCATENATED VOLUME............................................................................95
CREATING A STRIPED VOLUME .......................................................................................97
CREATING A MIRRORED VOLUME ..................................................................................100
Replicating Data in a Mirrored Volume
101
CREATING A RAID 10 AND RAID 0+1...........................................................................103
CHAPTER 7: VOLUME EXPOSURE & SECURITY.................................. 107
INTRODUCTION TO VOLUME EXPOSURE & SECURITY......................................................108
iSCSI Targets
Identities
Access Rights
Authentication
Default Identity
108
109
111
113
113
CREATING AN ISCSI TARGET........................................................................................115
Viewing iSCSI Targets
Viewing iSCSI Target Details
Viewing Access Rights
116
117
117
CHANGING THE DEFAULT IDENTITY................................................................................119
CREATING AN IDENTITY.................................................................................................120
ADDING INITIATORS TO AN IDENTITY ..............................................................................122
ASSIGNING IDENTITY CREDENTIALS...............................................................................125
Using a RADIUS Server
Viewing Configured RADIUS Servers
128
131
CONNECTING AN IDENTITY AND TARGET ........................................................................132
EXPOSING AN ISCSI TARGET AND LUN.........................................................................134
Viewing LUNs
136
CHAPTER 8: ADVANCED VOLUME OPERATIONS................................ 137
INTRODUCTION TO ADVANCED VOLUME CONFIGURATIONS .............................................138
Data Replication: Off-line versus On-line
Mirror versus Snapshot
Actual Capacity versus Potential Capacity
138
138
138
138
Resizing versus Expanding
Table of Contents
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING A VOLUME (OFF-LINE COPY) ..........................................................................139
SYNCHRONIZING A VOLUME ..........................................................................................140
ADDING A CHILD TO A MIRROR (ON-LINE COPY) ............................................................141
CREATING A SNAPSHOT................................................................................................144
Viewing Snapshot Volumes
149
BREAKING A MIRROR ...................................................................................................150
RESIZING A VOLUME.....................................................................................................153
Retracting a Volume
157
EXPANDING A VOLUME .................................................................................................158
CHAPTER 9: ROUTINE VOLUME MAINTENANCE................................ 161
VOLUMES ....................................................................................................................162
Renaming a Volume
Removing a Volume
Removing all Volumes in a Hierarchy
Replacing a Volume
162
162
164
165
166
Synchronizing a Volume
TARGETS AND EXPOSURE.............................................................................................167
Removing an LU
167
167
168
168
168
Changing iSCSI Target Parameters
Removing an iSCSI Target
Removing a RADIUS Server
Removing an iSNS Server
CHAPTER 10: ROUTINE V-SWITCH MAINTENANCE .......................... 169
GENERAL CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS......................................................................170
TELNET PORT ..............................................................................................................171
SNMP MANAGER.........................................................................................................173
Setting an SNMP Manager
Removing an SNMP Manager
173
173
ISNS SERVER..............................................................................................................174
Adding an iSNS Server
Removing an iSNS Server
174
174
USER PROFILES ...........................................................................................................174
Adding a User Profile
Changing a User Profile
Removing a User Profile
175
175
175
V-SWITCH....................................................................................................................176
Resetting a V-Switch
Saving (Uploading) a V-Switch Database File
Downloading a V-Switch Configuration File
176
176
177
NETWORK INTERFACES ................................................................................................177
Changing an Interface Alias
Adding an Interface IP Address
Removing an Interface IP Address
178
178
179
IP ROUTING .................................................................................................................180
Adding an IP route
Removing an IP route
180
180
10
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISKS AND SUBDISKS...................................................................................................181
Discovering Storage Devices
Renaming a Storage Device
Removing a Storage Device
Renaming a Subdisk
181
182
183
183
183
Removing a Subdisk
CLUSTERS ...................................................................................................................184
Modifying Neighbor Parameters
Removing a Neighbor
Modifying a Cluster
184
184
185
185
Enabling and Disabling Failover
V-SWITCH 3000 POWER SUPPLY ..................................................................................186
UPGRADING THE V-SWITCH SOFTWARE.........................................................................187
V-SWITCH 3000 COMPACT FLASH ................................................................................188
SAFE MODE .................................................................................................................190
Automatic Safe Mode
Exporting a Corrupted Database
Manual Safe Mode
190
192
192
CHAPTER 11: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ....................................... 195
V SWITCH CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................................197
init
198
198
199
199
199
200
200
200
201
201
202
202
202
203
203
203
204
204
204
205
205
206
206
206
207
207
208
208
208
209
209
admin show
admin add
admin remove
admin password
reset
info
device set
device set -telnet
fc interface show
fc node show
fc set speed
interface show
interface details
interface set
pscsi show
pscsi set busid
snmp manager show
snmp manager add
snmp manager set
snmp manager remove
ip config show
ip config set
ip config remove
ip route add
ip route show
ip route remove
ip isns show
ip isns add
ip isns remove
neighbor add
Table of Contents
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
neighbor set
209
209
210
210
210
211
211
211
212
212
212
213
213
213
214
214
neighbor show
neighbor details
neighbor remove
cluster show
cluster set
cluster failover enable
cluster failover disable
ft show
ft upload software
ft download
ft export problem
system boot
system set
system copy
system show
VOLUME CONFIGURATION.............................................................................................215
storage discovery
storage blink activate
storage blink abort
storage show
storage disk show
storage disk set
storage alias
storage details
storage set
storage remove
subdisk create
subdisk show
subdisk details
subdisk alias
subdisk set
subdisk remove
volume show
216
216
216
216
217
217
217
218
218
219
219
219
220
220
221
221
221
222
223
223
223
224
224
224
225
225
226
226
226
227
227
227
228
228
228
229
229
229
volume details
volume alias
volume hierarchy
volume create simple
volume create transparent
volume create mirror
volume create concatenated
volume create striped
volume set
volume remove
volume remove -all
volume replace
volume mirror show
volume mirror sync
volume mirror dummysync
volume copy create
volume copy show
volume copy abort
volume mirror add
volume mirror break
volume resize
12
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume retract
volume expand
volume create snapshot
volume snapshot show
volume snapshot list
230
230
230
231
231
VOLUME EXPOSURE .....................................................................................................232
iscsi portal show
iscsi portal create
iscsi portal remove
iscsi target show
iscsi target create
iscsi target alias
iscsi target set
iscsi target remove
iscsi target authentication
acl show
233
233
233
233
234
234
234
235
235
235
236
236
237
237
237
238
238
238
239
239
239
240
240
240
241
241
241
242
242
242
243
243
243
244
244
245
acl details
acl add
acl set
acl rem
acl identity show
acl identity details
acl identity create
acl identity delete
acl identity add name
acl identity remove name
acl identity add chap
acl identity remove chap
acl identity add srp
acl identity remove srp
acl identity set
acl up
acl down
ip radius show
ip radius add
ip radius set
ip radius remove
volume expose –new
volume expose
lu show
lu details
lu remove
CHAPTER 12: SAMPLE CONFIGURATIONS......................................... 247
SAMPLE INTRODUCTION................................................................................................248
INSTALLING AND USING THE V-SWITCH 3000.................................................................249
REPLACING A MIRRORED VOLUME ................................................................................256
REPLICATING DATA OFF-LINE .......................................................................................260
CONFIGURING THE V-SWITCH WITH A SINGLE IP ROUTING PATH.....................................263
CONFIGURING A CLUSTER ............................................................................................271
Table of Contents
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX.................................................................................................. 285
14
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
V-Switch
The V-Switch is a storage virtualization and management solution
that allows you to pool physical storage resources and re-partition
the total storage capacity into virtual volumes that best meet your
storage needs.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
V-SWITCH OVERVIEW
ORDER OF
OPERATIONS
The V-Switch is a high performance appliance that operates in the
data-path of a storage network between the hosts and storage sub-
system. It provides a single, easy-to-use connectivity and
management platform for administration of small to Enterprise
class storage resources.
MANUAL
ORGANIZATION
CLI - COMMAND LINE
INTERFACE
TECHNICAL
ASSISTANCE
The V-Switch enables a network administrator to create and
manage virtual storage volumes using SANRAD’s Volume
Manager. The Volume Manager supports the creation and
combination of concatenated, striped (RAID 0) and mirrored (RAID
1) volumes.
The Volume Manager provides for secure exposure of virtual
volumes to hosts using the standards-based iSCSI TCP/IP-based
protocol.
Chapter 1: V-Switch
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V-Switch Overview
The V-Switch provides protocol bridging, routing, switching and volume
management in a single platform.
Figure 1, page 17, details a standard V-Switch network topology. Two V-
Switches sit in the center of the network, providing load balancing and
failover ability.
Above the V-Switches are IP clouds connecting the network(s) management
and host stations. The hosts can connect to the V-Switch directly or via an
IP cloud. An iSCSI initiator agent in the host allows access to virtual
volumes in the V Switch.
Below the V-Switches are the network storage devices, which include both
JBOD (Just a Bunch Of Disks) and RAID subsystems. The V-Switch
provides the ability to connect via both SCSI and FC protocols, including FC
clouds, increasing the number of potential attached storage devices.
The V-Switch can be used in two modes:
ꢀ
ꢀ
iSCSI bridging switch
Storage virtualization switch
End-to-end Fibre Channel protocol networks are expensive to implement.
As an iSCSI bridging switch, the V-Switch acts as a protocol bridge between
storage devices on a Fibre Channel network and hosts on a standard IP
network.
The V-Switch also acts as a protocol bridge between SCSI storage devices
and hosts on a standard IP network.
Simple exposure of each storage device as a single LUN is an inefficient use
of storage resources. As a storage virtualization switch, the V-Switch
enables barrier-independent storage pooling with precise LUN carving of
new virtual volumes which support mirroring and striping with managed
exposure.
16
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host
Tower box
Host
Host
Management
Terminal
IP Cloud
Management
Terminal
IP
Cloud
Host
V-Switch 1
V-Switch 2
FC
Cloud
RAID
JBOD
SCSI
RAID RAID RAID
SCSI
Connection
Connection
Figure 1.
V-Switch Network Topology
Order of Operations
Whether being used as a bridging switch between FC or SCSI and iSCSI or
as a storage virtualization switch, the V-Switch is operated in the following
manner:
STEP 1.
CONNECT THE V-SWITCH TO THE REQUISITE DEVICES AND
NETWORKS; POWER UP THE V SWITCH.
STEP 2.
CONFIGURE THE V-SWITCH AND ITS INTERFACES.
STEP 3.
STEP 4.
CREATE VIRTUAL VOLUMES FROM THE PHYSICAL DISKS.
ASSIGN LUNS TO VIRTUAL VOLUMES; CREATE ISCSI TARGETS;
ATTACH LUNS TO TARGETS AND EXPOSE TO HOSTS.
17
Chapter 1: V-Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Organization
This manual is designed to guide you step-by-step through V-Switch
installation, configuration, virtualization, maintenance and troubleshooting.
The chapters are set up as follows:
Table 1:
Manual Chapter Organization
Chapter
Title
Description
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
“Installing the V-Switch
2000,” page 21
Explains the V-Switch2000
chassis, cabling connections
and power up procedures.
“Installing the V-Switch
3000,” page 33
Explains the V-Switch 3000
chassis, cabling connections
and power up procedures.
“V-Switch
Configuration,” page 45
Describes how to configure the
V-Switch management
parameters as well as the
network ports.
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
“V-Switch Cluster
Configuration,” page 71
Describes how to configure V-
Switches for a dual-V-Switch
cluster environment.
“Volume Configuration,” Describes how to configure and
page 83
create transparent, simple,
concatenated, mirrored and
striped volumes.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
“Volume Exposure &
Security,” page 107
Describes how to selectively
and securely expose and
manage host access to volumes.
“Advanced Volume
Operations,” page 139
Describes how to perform on
and off-line volume replication,
configure snapshots and
expand volumes.
Chapter 9
“Routine Volume
Maintenance,” page 165
Describes how to maintain and
manipulate existing volumes.
Chapter 10 “Routine V-Switch
Maintenance,” page 173
Explains how to execute basic
V-Switch maintenance
functions.
Chapter 11 “Command Line
Interface,” page 199
Describes all CLI commands
and their surrounding
parameters.
18
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Title
Description
Appendix
A
“Sample Configurations,” Provides working examples of
page 251
common V-Switch
configurations.
CLI - Command Line Interface
The Command Line Interface (CLI) is used to implement all V-Switch
management functions, including switching, virtualization and security.
The CLI is available via:
ꢀ
ꢀ
Console port via an RS232 connection.
10/100 Ethernet Management port via a Telnet session (V-Switch
3000 only).
ꢀ
1 Gb Ethernet port Eth1 via a Telnet session.
All CLI commands are case sensitive and must be entered in lower case.
Inputted data can include upper case letters but must always subsequently
be entered in the same case.
The CLI command prompt is >.
All CLI commands in this manual are listed first with the basic command
followed by a table of command switches; their explanations; status
(mandatory or optional) and an example for each command switch, as
shown in Table 2.
Table 2:
CLI Command
volume create transparent
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
–vol
Transparent1
VOLUME ALIAS
USER-GIVEN ALIAS
FOR THE VOLUME
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: DISK
ALIAS
-d
Disk1
DISK ALIAS
SYSTEM-GIVEN
ALIAS FOR THE
MANDATORY
DISK DURING DISK
AUTO-DISCOVERY
The CLI supports the use of the following hot keys for the listed functions:
Table 3:
Hot Keys
Description
Command
LIST OF COMMANDS WITH A SHORT DESCRIPTION OF EACH
?
19
Chapter 1: V-Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command
Description
RETURN TO MAIN MENU
!
ABORT CURRENT COMMAND
Esc
#
DISPLAY LAST COMMAND TO VIEW COMMAND HISTORY
COMPLETE A COMMAND TO THE POINT OF AMBIGUITY
Tab
Technical Assistance
SANRAD is continually striving to provide top-of-the-line products. If you
have questions, comments or require technical assistance, you can contact
SANRAD Technical Support at:
US and Americas: 1-866-301-8155
International: +972-3-941-1890
For further information on SANRAD and the SANRAD family of products,
please refer to:
http://www.sanrad.com
For more information on iSCSI and SCSI protocols, please refer to:
iSCSI: : http://www.ietf.org
iSCSI MIB: http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-ietf-ips-iscsi-mib-03.txt
SCSI MIB: http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-ietf-ips-scsi-mib-00.txt
SCSI-3: http://www.t10.org/scsi-3.htm
For more information on SNMP:
SNMP: http://www.snmplink.org/
20
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Installing the V-Switch 2000
The V-Switch 2000 is a 1U high performance storage networking
appliance that can be surface or rack mounted.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
After mounting the V-Switch 2000, connect the requisite cables.
The V-Switch 2000 contains the following:
CHASSIS
SURFACE MOUNTING
RACK MOUNTING
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Two storage port connections
Two network port connections
One console port connection
One onboard AC power supply
STORAGE PORT
CONNECTIONS
NETWORK PORT
CONNECTIONS
CONSOLE PORT
CONNECTION
POWERING UP
Chapter 2: Installing the V-Switch 2000
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chassis
The V-Switch 2000 is a 1 U surface or rack-mountable storage network
appliance. Its front panel includes the console port, network ports, storage
ports, system indicator LEDs and reset button. Its back panel includes the
fans and power supply.
Front Panel
1. RS232 console port
2. Two 1 Gb copper Ethernet network port interfaces
3. Two SCSI or two FC storage port interfaces
4. Reset push button
1
2
3
4
Figure 2.
V-Switch 2000 Front Panel – SCSI
1
2
3
4
Figure 3.
V-Switch 2000 Front Panel – FC
22
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Back Panel
5. Fans
6. Power supply
5
6
Figure 4.
V-Switch 2000 Back Panel
System Indicator LEDs
Table 4 lists the V-Switch 2000 indicator LEDs as shown in Figure 5, page
24.
Table 4:
V-Switch 2000 LEDs
Status Indication
No
LED
Color
1
ACT
NETWORK PORT IS ACTIVE
GREEN
SLOW BLINK: ACTIVE
FAST BLINK: PORT
TRAFFIC
2
3
3
1GB
NETWORK PORT IS OPERATING AT 1 GB
STORAGE PORT IS FUNCTIONING
GREEN
GREEN
SCSI/FC
LNK
STORAGE PORT IS FUNCTIONING AT 1
OR 2GB
GREEN: 1 GB
ORANGE: 2 GB
4
5
POWER
SYS OK
ALL POWER SUPPLIES FUNCTIONING
ALL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONING PROPERLY
GREEN
GREEN
Chapter 2: Installing the V-Switch 2000
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1
3
4
2
2
3
5
Figure 5.
V-Switch 2000 LEDs – SCSI
1
1
4
2
2
3
3
5
Figure 6.
V-Switch 2000 LEDs – FC
24
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Surface Mounting
The V-Switch 2000 chassis is manufactured with four chassis feet. The V-
Switch 2000 is ready to be mounted on any secure flat surface. If you plan
to rack mount the V-Switch 2000, continue with “Rack Mounting.”
Rack Mounting
The V-Switch 2000 chassis can be mounted on a 19-inch rack. The V-Switch
2000 can be mounted alone or two V-Switches can be joined and mounted
together in a single 1U space.
The V-Switch 2000 is shipped with an accessory packet of hardware. This
packet includes four non-identical L-brackets and twelve bracket screws for
rack mounting
You need the following tools to rack-mount the V-Switch 2000:
ꢁ
ꢁ
A Philips screwdriver suitable for L-bracket screws
Four rack-post screws (and clips if necessary) suitable for the
equipment rack
ꢁ
A screwdriver suitable for the rack-post screws
STEP 1.
PLACE THE V-SWITCH 2000 RIGHT SIDE UP ON A SECURE FLAT
SURFACE NEAR THE RACK
STEP 2.
ATTACH THE LEFT FRONT L-BRACKET
The left front (when facing the V-Switch) L-bracket is the wide L-bracket with
two round openings for air intake.
Attach it with four of the included screws. The bracket sits directly against the
V Switch.
STEP 3.
ATTACH THE RIGHT FRONT L-BRACKET
There are two types of right front L-brackets, depending on if the V-Switch is
single or dual-mounted.
For single-mounting, use the long arm L-bracket to span the space from the V-
Switch to the rack. Attach it with four of the included screws.
For dual-mounting, use the short L-bracket on both V-Switches. Then place the
two V-Switches side by side with the lip of the left V-Switch L-bracket in front of
the lip of the right V-Switch L-bracket. Attach the two V-Switches by inserting
two screws through the front holes of the overlapping L-brackets.
Chapter 2: Installing the V-Switch 2000
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 4.
ATTACH THE REAR L-BRACKET
If a single V-Switch is being mounted, attach the rear L-bracket to the left side
of the V-Switch.
If dual V-Switches are being mounted, attach a second rear L-bracket to the
right side of the right V-Switch as well.
STEP 5.
ATTACH THE V-SWITCH 2000 TO THE RACK MOUNTING POSTS
Insert the rear of the V-Switch 2000 between the rack mounting posts until the
L-bracket(s) touch the rack mounting posts.
Align the mounting holes on the rear L-brackets with the mounting holes on the
rack mounting posts.
Using screws that you provide, attach the V-Switch 2000 to the rack mounting
posts by screwing two screws on each side through the L-brackets and into the
threaded holes in the rack mounting posts.
Once the V-Switch 2000 is mounted, you can begin connecting the requisite
cables.
26
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage Port Connections
Connect the SAN storage devices or fabric to the V-Switch 2000 using the
FC/SCSI storage ports.
The storage ports are located on the front right of the V-Switch 2000. The
type of storage ports on your V-Switch 2000 will vary depending on your V-
Switch 2000 order specifications – either two SCSI or two FC ports.
The V-Switch 2000 contains a storage auto-discovery function. At power-
up the V-Switch 2000 automatically scans for and registers all attached and
powered up network storage devices.
If you are building a V-Switch 2000 cluster, power up each disk one at a
time after connecting them to the powered-up V-Switches. This allows
each disk to be numbered with the same default disk number on each V-
Switch 2000 during auto-discovery. This will make cluster configuration
easier. For more information on V-Switch 2000 clusters, see “V-Switch
Cluster Configuration,” page 71.
SCSI Storage
Ports
Figure 7.
V-Switch 2000 SCSI Storage Ports
The V-Switch 2000 supports two storage ports in any combinations of the
following:
Table 5:
SCSI Storage Port Connection Type
SCSI CONNECTOR
LENGTH
SCSI ULTRA3 LVD 160MB/SEC 68 PIN PORT
UP TO 12M
Chapter 2: Installing the V-Switch 2000
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FC Storage
Ports
Figure 8.
V-Switch 2000 FC Storage Ports
Table 6:
FC Storage Port Connection Types
FIBRE CHANNEL 1 GBIT/2 GBIT NL_PORT OR
N_PORT OF EITHER
LENGTH
SFP
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
SHORT-WAVE LASER FOR MULTIMODE
FIBER
UP TO 550M
UP TO 10KM
UP TO 25M
SHORT-WAVE SFP
LONG-WAVE SFP
–
Your exact port
configuration will
depend on your V-
Switch 2000 order
specifications.
LONG-WAVE LASER FOR SINGLE-MODE
FIBER
COPPER (1 GBIT)
When connecting more than one V-Switch 2000 to a group of storage
devices, ensure that the same port on each V-Switch 2000 is used to connect
to the same storage device. This increases the chance of the storage device
receiving the same default storage number on both V-Switches during their
auto-discovery cycles. This, in turn, makes cluster configuration easier.
There are two FC storage port LEDs labeled lnk, one to the left of each
storage port.
28
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Port Connections
The copper network ports, labeled Eth 1 and 2, are located on the front left
of the V-Switch 2000. Use the 1Gb Ethernet ports to connect to the network
or directly to the host station.
When configuring your network topology, keep in mind that the current
initiator technology does not support volume access by more than one
server at a time. There are two methods for allowing multi-server access to
a volume:
ꢁ
Connect a single server to the V-Switch 2000 and allow other server
to access the volume via file sharing.
ꢁ
Install volume-sharing software to coordinate the read/write
functionalities and data synchronization between servers.
The network ports support all of the following:
Table 7:
Network Port Cable Connections
CABLE
LENGTH
SFP
1000BASE-TX (TWISTED-PAIR) OVER CATEGORY
5 UTP
UP TO 100M
__
Copper
RJ45
Network Ports
Figure 9.
V-Switch 2000 Network Ports
Each network port has two LEDs:
ꢁ
ꢁ
act – indicates whether the port is connected and active: slow blink
– active; fast blink – port traffic.
1 Gb – indicates whether the port is operating at 1 Gb. The LED is
off if the port is operating at 10/100.
Chapter 2: Installing the V-Switch 2000
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Console Port Connection
The console port, labeled Console, is located on the front left of the V-
Switch 2000. Use this RS232 port and included male-female straight cable to
connect a console or dumb terminal to the V-Switch 2000 for initial system
configuration and local management.
Console
Port
Figure 10.
V-Switch 2000 Console Port
Powering Up
You can power up the V-Switch 2000 once you have connected and
powered up the storage devices. The V-Switch 2000 contains a storage
auto-discovery function. At power-up the V-Switch 2000 automatically
scans for and registers all attached and powered up network storage
devices. Therefore, power up all storage devices before powering up the
V-Switch 2000. Storage devices added after V-Switch 2000 power-up will
be registered in the next V-Switch 2000 storage network scan.
Do not power the V-
Switch 2000 up and
down quickly. The
power supply is
protected against
electrical surges and
needs at least 5
seconds between
power down and
power up.
The V-Switch 2000 contains one onboard auto-switch 100V/230V AC
power supply.
30
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power
Switch
Figure 11.
V-Switch 2000 Power Supplies
Reconfirm that all storage devices are powered up. Plug the power cable
into the V-Switch 2000 power supply and then into the power source. Push
the power switch to the ON position. The V-Switch 2000 powers up.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
The Power indicator LED on the front right of the V-Switch 2000
turns green.
Each network port 1 Gb indicator LED turns green only if
connected to the network and operating at 1 Gb.
Each storage port indicator LED on the front right of the V-Switch
2000 is green if connected to storage.@@ One color if connected and
another color if operating at the same speed.
ꢁ
The fans start operating.
You are now able to initialize the V-Switch 2000.
Chapter 2: Installing the V-Switch 2000
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Notes
32
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Installing the V-Switch 3000
The V-Switch 3000 is a 1U high performance storage networking
appliance that can be surface or rack mounted.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
After mounting the V-Switch 3000, connect the requisite cables.
The V-Switch 3000 contains the following:
CHASSIS
SURFACE MOUNTING
RACK MOUNTING
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Up to four storage port connections
Three network port connections
One management port connection
One console port connection
STORAGE PORT
CONNECTIONS
NETWORK PORT
CONNECTIONS
CONSOLE PORT
CONNECTION
MANAGEMENT PORT
CONNECTION
One Compact Flash (CF) slot
LCD
One scalability port connection
Two removable redundant AC power supplies
COMPACT FLASH (CF)
SLOT
SCALABILITY PORT
POWERING UP
Chapter 3: Installing the V-Switch 3000
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chassis
The V-Switch 3000 is a 1 U surface or rack-mountable storage network
appliance. Its front panel includes the LCD display and programming
buttons, system indicator LEDs and network ports. Its back panel includes
the storage ports, redundant power supplies, compact flash and console
port.
Front Panel
1. LCD display
2. LCD display programming buttons
3. One 10/100 Management Port
4. Three 1 Gb Ethernet Network Ports; both copper and FO interfaces
5. System Indicator LEDs
RJ45
1
3
SFP
2
4
4
4
5
Figure 12.
V-Switch 3000 Front Panel
Back Panel
6. Two - four SCSI / Fibre Channel Storage Ports
7. Dual fault tolerant power supplies
8. Removable Compact Flash (CF) slot
9. Scalability Port
10. RS232 Console Port
6
7
10
9
8
Figure 13.
V-Switch 3000 Back Panel
34
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Indicator LEDs
Table 8 lists the V-Switch 3000 indicator LEDs as shown in Figure 14.
Table 8:
V-Switch 3000 LEDs
No
LED
Status Indication
Color
1
2
3
POWER
SYS OK
SCALE
ALL POWER SUPPLIES FUNCTIONING
ALL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONING PROPERLY
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
SCALABILITY PORT IS FUNCTIONING
CURRENTLY NOT SUPPORTED
4
ACT
MANAGEMENT PORT IS ACTIVE
GREEN
ON: ACTIVE
BLINKING: PORT
TRAFFIC
5
6
100
MANAGEMENT PORT IS OPERATING AT
100 MBPS
GREEN
ACT
NETWORK PORT IS ACTIVE
GREEN
SLOW BLINK: ACTIVE
FAST BLINK: PORT
TRAFFIC
7
8
1GB (SCSI)
SCSI
NETWORK PORT IS OPERATING AT 1 GB
STORAGE PORT IS FUNCTIONING
GREEN: 1 GB
GREEN: NEGOTIATED
STORAGE
8
FC
STORAGE PORT IS FUNCTIONING
GREEN: 1 GB
AMBER: 2 GB*
*ONLY ON CERTAIN
ALL-FC MODELS
2
Sys OK
4
act
6
act
6
act
6
act
1
Power
Scale
3
100
5
1 GB
7
1 GB
7
1 GB
7
FC/SCSI
8
Figure 14.
V-Switch 3000 LEDs
35
Chapter 3: Installing the V-Switch 3000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Surface Mounting
The V-Switch 3000 chassis is manufactured with four chassis feet. The V-
Switch 3000 is ready to be mounted on any secure flat surface. If you plan
to rack mount the V-Switch 3000, continue with “Rack Mounting.”
Rack Mounting
The V-Switch 3000 chassis can be mounted on a 19-inch rack.
The V-Switch 3000 is shipped with an accessory packet of hardware. This
packet includes two L-brackets, two rear mounts (one left and one right)
and ten bracket screws for mounting the L-brackets.
You need the following tools to rack-mount the V-Switch 3000:
ꢁ
ꢁ
A Philips screwdriver suitable for L-bracket screws
Eight rack-post screws (and clips if necessary) suitable for the
equipment rack; four for the front mounts and four for the rear
mounts
ꢁ
A screwdriver suitable for the rack-post screws
STEP 1.
ATTACH THE REAR MOUNTS
Using screws that you provide, attach the rear mounts to the back mounting
posts so that the length of each mount is parallel to the floor and extends
forward into the rack space.
The lip of each mount is at the bottom and facing inward toward the opposite
rear mount.
The rear of the V-Switch 3000 will be supported from underneath on these lips.
STEP 2.
PLACE THE V-SWITCH 3000 RIGHT SIDE UP ON A SECURE FLAT
SURFACE NEAR THE RACK
STEP 3.
ATTACH THE L-BRACKETS ON BOTH SIDES OF THE CHASSIS
Use the ten screws included in the accessory packet to attach the L-brackets to
the chassis.
STEP 4.
INSERT THE V-SWITCH 3000 INTO THE RACK
This step works best with two people: one at the rear of the rack coordinating
the V-Switch/mount connection and one at the front of the rack inserting the V-
Switch.
This step works best
with two people.
36
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slide the V-Switch 3000 into the rack making sure to position the V-Switch 3000
to rest on the rear mounts.
The rear mounts may turn inward slightly before the V-witch 3000 is inserted.
If the V-Switch does not enter easily, push the mount lips outward slightly while
inserting the V-Switch 3000.
Insert the rear of the V-Switch 3000 until the L-brackets touch the rack
mounting posts.
STEP 5.
ATTACH THE V-SWITCH 3000 TO THE RACK MOUNTING POSTS
Align the mounting holes on the L-brackets with the mounting holes on the rack
mounting posts making sure that the L-brackets are the same height as the rear
mounts.
Using screws that you provide, attach the V-Switch to the rack mounting posts
by screwing two screws on each side through the L-brackets and into the
threaded holes in the rack mounting posts.
Once the V-Switch 3000 is mounted, you can begin connecting the requisite
cables.
Storage Port Connections
Connect the SAN storage devices or fabric to the V-Switch 3000 using the
FC/SCSI storage ports.
The storage ports are located on the back upper left of the V-Switch 3000.
The number and configuration of storage ports on your V-Switch 3000 will
vary depending on your V-Switch 3000 order specifications.
The V-Switch 3000 contains a storage auto-discovery function. At power-
up the V-Switch 3000 automatically scans for and registers all attached and
powered up network storage devices.
If you are building a V-Switch 3000 cluster, power up each disk one at a
time after connecting them to the powered-up V-Switches. This allows
each disk to be numbered with the same default disk number on each V-
Switch 3000 during auto-discovery. This will make cluster configuration
easier. For more information on V-Switch clusters, see “Introduction to V-
Switch Clusters,” page 72.
SCSI / Fibre Channel
(Storage) Ports
Figure 15.
V-Switch 3000 Storage Ports
When connecting more than one V-Switch 3000 to a group of storage
devices, ensure that the same port on each V-Switch 3000 is used to connect
to the same storage device. This increases the chance of the storage device
37
Chapter 3: Installing the V-Switch 3000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
receiving the same default storage number on both V-Switches during their
auto-discovery cycles. This, in turn, makes cluster configuration easier.
The V-Switch 3000 supports up to four storage ports in any combinations in
pairs of the following:
Table 9:
Storage Port Connection Types
FC CONNECTOR
LENGTH
FIBRE CHANNEL 1 GBIT/2 GBIT NL_PORT OR
N_PORT OF EITHER:
Your exact port
configuration will
depend on your V-
Switch 3000 order
specifications.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
SHORT-WAVE LASER FOR MULTIMODE
FIBER
UP TO 550M
UP TO 10KM
LONG-WAVE LASER FOR SINGLE-MODE
FIBER
COPPER (1 GBIT)
UP TO 25M
UP TO 12M
SCSI ULTRA3 LVD 160MB/SEC 68 PIN PORT
There are four storage ports LEDs, labeled FC/SCSI 1, 2, 3 &4, on the front
right of the V-Switch 3000 for up to four storage ports.
Storage Port LEDs
Figure 16.
V-Switch 3000 Storage Port LEDs
38
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Port Connections
The network ports, labeled Eth 1, 2 & 3, are located on the front right of the
V-Switch 3000. Use the 1Gb Ethernet ports to connect to the network or
directly to the host station.
Each network port has both a fiber optic and copper connector but only one
cable, either fiber optic or copper, can be connected to each port. To connect
a fiber-optic cable you need a Small Form Factor Package (SFP) optical
transceiver to couple to the fiber optic cable and insert into the network SFP
port. Please refer to Figure 17, page 40.
At power up, the V-Switch 3000 automatically registers which connector,
copper or fiber optic, is active by searching for an SFP optical transceiver.
The presence of an SFP will automatically determine which mode is active.
A copper connection
will not work if an
SFP is present in the
port.
Once the port is active in one mode, it will not change modes unless the
first, active connection is broken first. This means that once the port is
active over a copper connection, the insertion of an SFP optical transceiver
into the fiber optic connector will not change the port activity to fiber
optic. The copper connection must first be broken and then the fiber optic
connection made.
Conversely, if a port is active on a fiber optic connection and you want to
switch to copper, it is not enough to remove the fiber optic connection
from the SFP optical transceiver. The SFP optical transceiver must also be
removed from the fiber optic connector. Only then can the port activity
switch to a copper connection.
When configuring your network topology, keep in mind that the current
initiator technology does not support volume access by more than one
server at a time. There are two methods for allowing multi-server access to
a volume:
ꢁ
Connect a single server to the V-Switch 3000 and allow other
servers to access the volume via file sharing.
ꢁ
Install volume-sharing software to coordinate the read/write
functionalities and data synchronization between servers.
The network ports support all of the following:
Table 10:
Network Port Cable Connections
CABLE
LENGTH
SFP
1000BASE-SX SHORT-WAVE LASER FOR
MULTIMODE FIBER
FROM 275M TO 550M
UP TO 10KM
SHORT-WAVE SFP
1000BASE-LX LONG-WAVE LASER FOR SINGLE
MODE FIBER
LONG-WAVE SFP
39
Chapter 3: Installing the V-Switch 3000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CABLE
LENGTH
SFP
1000BASE-TX (TWISTED-PAIR) OVER CATEGORY
5 UTP
UP TO 100M
__
Ethernet (Network) Ports
Copper
RJ45
Fiber Optic
SFP
Figure 17.
V-Switch 3000 Network Ports
Each network port has two LEDs:
ꢁ
ꢁ
act – indicates whether the port is connected and active: slow blink
– active; fast blink – port traffic.
1 Gb – indicates whether the port is operating at 1 Gb. The LED is
off if the port is operating at 10/100.
Console Port Connection
The console port, labeled Console, is located on the back lower left of the V-
Switch 3000. Use this RS232 port and included male-female straight cable to
connect a console or dumb terminal to the V-Switch 3000 for system
configuration.
Console Port
Figure 18.
V-Switch 3000 Console Port
40
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Management Port Connection
The management port, labeled 10/100 mgmt, is located on the front center
of the V-Switch 3000. Use this 10/100 port to connect a host station either
directly or via a network to the V-Switch 3000. When connecting directly
to the V-Switch 3000 via 10/100, use a male-female straight cable. When
connecting via a network, use a standard network cable. For more
information on V-Switch 3000 management options, please refer to
“Introduction to Managing the V-Switch,” page 46.
Management Port - RJ45
Figure 19.
V-Switch 3000 Management Port
The management port has two LEDs:
ꢁ
ꢁ
act – indicates whether the port is connected and active: green –
active; blinking – port traffic
100 – indicates how the port is operational: on – 100; off – 10.
act LED
100 LED
Figure 20.
V-Switch 3000 Management Port LEDs
41
Chapter 3: Installing the V-Switch 3000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD
The LCD is located on the front left of the V-Switch 3000. The LCD has two
rows of 16 characters each in addition to six control buttons. Use the LCD
buttons and display for initial V-Switch 3000 configurations immediately
after power up. For more information on configuring the V-Switch 3000 via
LCD, please refer to “Configuring the V-Switch 3000 Management
Parameters via LCD,” page 48.
LCD
Figure 21.
LCD Display Panel
Compact Flash (CF) Slot
The compact flash slot, labeled CF Card, is located on the back center of the
V-Switch 3000. A compact flash card is inserted into the slot and the
configuration database is mirrored into the flash card for configuration
recovery if replacing a V-Switch 3000.
42
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scalability Port
The scalability port is for future use and is not supported currently. The
scalability port, labeled Scalability, is located on the back lower left side of
the V-Switch 3000. The scalability port is a V-Switch 3000 interconnectivity
port. Using SANRAD’s proprietary scalability cable, two V-Switches can be
connected and synchronized to function as one V-Switch 3000 to provide
resource sharing and computational power increase.
Scalability Port
Figure 22.
Scalability Port
The scalability port has one LED, labeled Scale, on the front right of the V-
Switch 3000 to indicate operability.
Scalability LED
Figure 23.
Scalability Port LED
43
Chapter 3: Installing the V-Switch 3000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Powering Up
You can power up the V-Switch 3000 once you have connected and
powered up the storage devices. The V-Switch 3000 contains a storage
auto-discovery function. At power- up the V-Switch 3000 automatically
scans for and registers all attached and powered up network storage
devices. Therefore, power up all storage devices before powering up the V-
Switch 3000. Storage devices added after V-Switch 3000 power- up will be
registered in the next V-Switch 3000 storage network scan.
The V-Switch 3000 contains two removable auto-switch 100V/230V AC
redundant power supplies.
Redundant
Power Supplies
Figure 24.
V-Switch 3000 Power Supplies
Reconfirm that all storage devices are powered up and connected to the V-
Switch. Plug the power cables into the V-Switch 3000 power supplies and
then into the power source. Push the power switch to the ON position. The
V-Switch 3000 powers up.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
The Power indicator LED on the front right of the V-Switch 3000
turns green.
Each network port 1 Gb indicator LED turns green only if
connected to the network and operating at 1 Gb.
Each storage port indicator LED on the front right of the V-Switch
3000 is green if connected to storage.
ꢁ
ꢁ
The fans start operating.
The LCD panel displays “V-Switch 3000 SANRAD Corp.”
You are now able to initialize the V-Switch 3000.
44
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
V-Switch Configuration
After the V-Switch is connected properly to the physical disks,
management station and the network and powered up, the V-
Switch must be configured.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
INTRODUCTION TO
MANAGING THE V-
SWITCH
The basic V-Switch configurations define the management IP
configurations and can be done either via the LCD panel for the V-
Switch 3000 or the RS232 console port for both the V-Switch 3000
and the V-Switch 2000.
CONFIGURING THE V-
SWITCH 3000
MANAGEMENT
PARAMETERS VIA LCD
Once the management port is configured, any other V-Switch
configuration can be executed through the management port or
continued through the RS232 console port.
CONFIGURING THE
MANAGEMENT
CONSOLE
Disks and LUNs connected to the storage ports are discovered and
registered automatically.
INITIALIZING THE V-
SWITCH
CHANGING
MANAGEMENT
PARAMETERS
CONFIGURING THE
STORAGE PORTS
CONFIGURING THE
NETWORK PORTS
DISCOVERING ISCSI
TARGETS
CONFIGURING ISCSI
PORTALS
CONFIGURING IP
ROUTING
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to Managing the V-Switch
After powering up the V-Switch you must configure its management
parameters before doing any other configuration operations, namely
creating virtual disks.
This basic configuration can be done using the V-Switch LCD panel or via a
console or dumb terminal to open a direct connection with the V-Switch’s
RS232 console port.
The V-Switch can be managed in one of three different ways with each
requiring a different management configuration.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Out-of-band: The management terminal connects to the V-Switch’s
dedicated 10/100 management port via a fast Ethernet network to
pass management commands to the V-Switch in a Telnet session.
This is the most secure type of management connection for the V-
Switch. Please refer to A in Figure 25, page 47. The management
IP address entered in the initialization command is assigned to the
10/100 management port by default for out-of-band management
In-band: The management terminal connects to the V-Switch’s first
1Gb Ethernet network port, Eth1. This type of connection uses the
same Ethernet network to pass management commands to the V-
Switch in a Telnet session as the hosts use for accessing storage
data. Please refer to B in Figure 25, page 47. You can configure the
management IP address to Eth1 via the LCD or an initial out-of-
band connection using the CLI command init. If the
management port is not set to Eth1 during initialization, you will
need the CLI command device set to set the management port
to Eth1 for in-band management.
ꢀ
RS232: The management terminal connects to the V-Switch’s
RS232 console port to pass management commands to the V-
Switch in a direct connection. Please refer to C in Figure 25, page
47. The management IP address mandatory in the initialization
command and assigned to the 10/100 management port by default
for out-of-band management, will go unused in actuality.
46
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
In-Band Management
Telnet Station
IP Cloud
Gb port
Gb port
10/100 port
10/100 port
RS232 port
RS232 port
Modem
Fast Ethernet Network
C
A
C
Modem
Console
Console
Clients
Management Terminal
Out-of-Band Management
Figure 25.
V-Switch Management Options
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the V-Switch 3000 Management
Parameters via LCD
After successfully powering up, the V-Switch 3000 LCD display panel
displays:
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
Using the Enter and arrow buttons, you toggle between LCD screens and
input the V-Switch management parameters. The Back and Forward
buttons toggle between spaces. The Up and Down buttons scroll between
values in a space. Press Esc at any time to escape from a field or return to
the previous screen level.
Figure 26.
LCD Display Panel and Buttons
STEP 1.
TOGGLE TO THE IP CONFIGURE SCREEN
From the main status screen, press Enter. The IP Configuration screen
appears.
The default
management port via
LCD is Eth1.
IP CONFIG
Press Enter again. The IP Config Eth1 Port screen appears.
IP Config
ETH1 Port
Press Enter again. The Insert IP screen appears.
Use the Back and Forward buttons to toggle to the desired interface: mgn or
eth1.
STEP 2.
ENTER MANAGEMENT PORT IP ADDRESS
Enter the management port IP address using the arrow buttons. The Back and
Forward buttons toggle between spaces. The Up and Down buttons scroll
between values in a space.
Insert IP
_ _ _._ _ _._ _ _._ _ _
2 1 2.1 9 9.0 4 3.0 4 6
Press Enter to enter the IP address and progress to the IP Mask screen.
STEP 3.
ENTER MANAGEMENT PORT IP MASK
48
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enter the management port IP mask using the arrow buttons.
Mask
_ _ _._ _ _._ _ _._ _ _
2 5 5.2 5 5.2 5 5.0 0 0
Press Enter to enter the IP mask and return to the main V-Switch Status
screen.
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
After initializing the V-Switch via the LCD display panel and buttons, you
are ready to connect your management station to the V-Switch via the Eth1
management port and appropriate cable.
You are now ready to log in to the V-Switch. Continue with “Initializing
the V-Switch,” page 50.
Configuring the Management Console
To configure the V-Switch management parameters via CLI, you must first
open a communication session with the V-Switch via a console. From the
console, you use CLI to initialize the V-Switch. Initialization includes
assigning a name to the V-Switch; an IP address and mask to the
management port and a UDP port for SNMP communications.
After configuring the V-Switch management parameters, you can connect a
management station and log in to the V-Switch via the 1 Gb Ethernet port,
Eth 1(in-band management), the 10/100 Mb management port (out-of-band
management) or continue managing the V-Switch via console.
STEP 1.
CONNECT THE V-SWITCH TO A CONSOLE
Plug the included cross cable into your console’s RS232 port and then into the
V-Switch’s console port, located on the back panel.
STEP 2.
CONFIGURE THE CONSOLE
Configure your console according to the following parameters to communicate
with the V-Switch.
PARAMETER
SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
CONFIG SERIAL PORT
BITS PER SECOND
DATA BITS
COMX (ACCORDING TO YOUR PHYSICAL PORT CONNECTION)
115200
8
PARITY
NONE
1
STOP BITS
FLOW CONTROL
NONE
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After configuring the console, you can now log in to the V-Switch using
your installed terminal emulation application and configure the basic V-
Switch parameters. You will then be able to manage the V-Switch via the 1
Gb Ethernet port, Eth1 (in-band) or the 10/100Mb management port (out-
of-band). Continue with “Initializing the V-Switch”.
Initializing the V-Switch
Before you can begin managing your storage pool, you must initialize the
V-Switch. This includes assigning a name to the V-Switch; an IP address
and mask for the management port and a TCP/UDP port for SNMP
communications. Use the CLI command init to initialize the V-Switch.
If you have configured the V-Switch 3000 management IP address via LCD,
you can open a Telnet session and log in to the V-Switch remotely to
initialize it. If you have not configured the V-Switch 3000 management IP
address or you are working with a V-Switch 2000, you can log in to the V-
Switch locally via the RS232 serial connection established in the last section
and initialize it.
Access to the V-Switch is password protected. The V-Switch ships with the
default user name sanrad and the default password sanrad. After logging
in, a total of ten user names with passwords can be configured on a V-
Switch. The default user name and password sanrad can be maintained or
removed. The user name can have from one to twenty characters. The user
password can have from six to twelve characters. Both fields are case
sensitive and accept all characters, including spaces.
STEP 1.
OPEN A TELNET SESSION (REMOTE MANAGEMENT ONLY)
From the Windows Start menu, select Run.
In the Open window, enter:
telnet 212.199.43.46
Click OK. A Telnet session window opens.
STEP 2.
LOG IN TO THE V-SWITCH
Press Enter on your keyboard to open the V-Switch 3000 Login window.
After establishing a
Telnet session, you
must press Enter to
open the V-Switch
Login window.
All CLI names and
aliases are case
sensitive.
Figure 27.
V-Switch 3000 Login Screen
50
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enter the default user name, sanrad, and password, sanrad, and press Enter
on your keyboard. The CLI prompt > appears. You are now logged in and
ready to begin configuring your V-Switch for volume virtualization and exposure.
STEP 3.
INITIALIZE THE V-SWITCH
Use the CLI command init to configure the V-Switch management parameters.
init
You need to define five parameters to configure the V-Switch for the first
time:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
VSwitch
NAME
USER-ASSIGNED
NAME FOR THE V-
SWITCH
MANDATORY
DEFAULT:
VSWITCH
-n
212.199.43.46
MANAGEMENT IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE MANAGEMENT
PORT
MANDATORY
-ip
-im
-p
MANAGEMENT IP
MASK
IP MASK FOR THE
MANAGEMENT PORT
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
255.255.255.0
UDP PORT
PORT THROUGH
WHICH ALL UDP
COMMUNICATIONS
WILL FLOW –
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 161
NAMELY FOR SNMP
INTERFACE ALIAS
ALIAS OF PORT FOR
MANAGING V-
SWITCH
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: MGMT
(ETH1 OR
MGMT)
-if
Example:
init –n VSwitch –ip 212.199.43.46
After the V-Switch is initialized, this CLI command will disappear from the
CLI menu.
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Management Parameters
After logging in to the V-Switch, you can change the general management
parameters and Telnet communications port as well as add user login
profiles.
Changing General Management Parameters
You can change V-Switch management parameters (IP address and mask)
or UDP port number as well as include details of whom to contact in the
event of technical difficulties and which read/write communities to send
traps to. Use the CLI command device setto add or change
management parameters. This command will not appear in the CLI menu
until the V-Switch is initialized.
device set
You can define or change thirteen parameters using this command:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-n
VSwitch1
NAME
USER-ASSIGNED
NAME FOR THE V-
SWITCH
OPTIONAL
-ip
-im
-p
212.199.43.47
MANAGEMENT IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE MANAGEMENT
PORT
OPTIONAL
MANAGEMENT IP
MASK
IP MASK FOR THE
MANAGEMENT PORT
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
255.255.255.0
UDP PORT
PORT THROUGH
WHICH ALL UDP
COMMUNICATIONS
WILL FLOW –
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 161
NAMELY FOR SNMP
-if
INTERFACE ALIAS
ALIAS OF PORT FOR
MANAGING V-
SWITCH
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: MGMT
(ETH1 OR
MGMT)
-d
-t
-c
21/07/2002
13:30
DATE
LOCAL DATE
LOCAL TIME
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
TIME
AnnaLevin
CONTACT
CONTACT PERSON
IN THE EVENT OF A
SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
52
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-loc
ext4838
LOCATION
LOCATION OF THE
CONTACT PERSON
OPTIONAL
-rld
no
REPORT LUN
DISCOVERY
MODE FOR
OPTIONAL
DISCOVERING
DEVICE LUNS
YES OR NO
DEFAULT: YES
-telnet
-rcom
1597
TELNET PORT
PORT FOR V-
SWITCH
COMMUNICATIONS
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 23
READ
COMMUNITY TO
OPTIONAL
COMMUNITY
GET INFORMATION
DEFAULT:
PUBLIC
-wcom
WRITE
COMMUNITY TO SET
INFORMATION
OPTIONAL
COMMUNITY
DEFAULT:
PRIVATE
Example:
The V-Switch alias is reset to V-Switch 1; the IP address for V-Switch
management functions is changed to 212.199.43.47. The date is set to the
21st of July, 2002 and the time to 1:30 p.m. Anna Levin is named as the
contact person and she can be reached at the internal office extension 4838.
device set –n VSwitch1 –ip 212.199.43.47 –d 21/07/2002 –
t 13:30 –c AnnaLevin –loc ext4838
You can now connect to the V-Switch 1 Gb Ethernet port or 10/100Mb
management port and begin managing the V-Switch operations and the
attached SAN.
Checking the V-Switch Configurations
After setting the general V-Switch Management configurations, you can use
the CLI command infoto access the V-Switch Configuration table and
view the current configuration, including whom to contact in the event of
technical difficulties.
info
Table 11:
V-Switch Configuration
Parameter
Name
Value
VSwitch1
Description
SW Version 2.0, build 4,patch 0
Board version 1, PCB version 0
ID
-1
Contact
Location
Status
Anna Levin
Ext. 4838
OK
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
Object ID
Value
1.3.6.1.4.1 10059 1.1.2
Time Since Last Reset 12 days 17 hours 29 min 32 sec
Mgmt IP Address
Mgmt UDP Port
212.199.43.47
161
Date & Time [DD/MM/YY] 21/04/02 13:33
Telnet Port
Eth
23
Up
FC
Up
Read Community
Write Community
Public
Private
Changing the Telnet Communications Port
If your Telnet communications connection to the V-Switch traverses a
firewall, the standard Telnet communications port 23 may be blocked by the
firewall as a security measure. To enable Telnet communications to the V-
Switch, you can designate an alternate port using the CLI command
device set -telnet. This port can be opened in the firewall for
dedicated Telnet-V-Switch communications.
device set -telnet
Example:
The port 1597 is programmed as the Telnet communications port.
device set -telnet 1597
Use the CLI command infoto check the V-Switch’s designated Telnet port.
Adding an SNMP Manager
You can add a manager to the V-Switch. If you are working with
StoragePro, the V-Switch GUI management system, StoragePro will
automatically be included as a manager. If you are still not working with
StoragePro, there are no default managers defined for the V-Switch. You
can use the CLI command snmp manager addto add managers to the V-
Switch.
snmp manager add
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.96
IP ADDRESS
MANAGER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-p
162
UPD PORT
PORT TO RECEIVE
TRAPS THROUGH
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 162
54
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-rcom
public
READ COMMUNITY
COMMUNITY TO
OPTIONAL
GET INFORMATION
DEFAULT:
PUBLIC
-wcom
-trap
private
yes
WRITE COMMUNITY
COMMUNITY TO SET
INFORMATION
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
PRIVATE
TRAP
TO SEND TRAPS TO
MANAGER
OPTIONAL
YES: SEND
NO: DO NOT
SEND
DEFAULT: YES
Example
An SNMP manager is added on IP address 212.199.43.96. It receives traps
through port 162. The manager receives information through the public
community and writes information through the private community.
snmp manager add –ip 212.199.43.96 –p 162 –rcom public –
wcom private –trap yes
Adding User Login Profiles
After logging in to a V-Switch, a total of ten user profiles (name plus
password) can be configured on a V-Switch using the CLI command
admin add. The default user name and password sanrad can be
maintained or removed. The user name can have from one to twenty
characters. The user password can have from six to twelve characters.
Both fields are case sensitive and accept all characters, including spaces.
All CLI names and
aliases are case
sensitive.
Example
admin add
You need to define two parameters to configure a user profile:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-un
Joe Cool
USER NAME
USER NAME
MANDATORY
-pw
123456
PASSWORD
USER PASSWORD
MANDATORY
6 CHARACTER
MINIMUM
Example
admin add –un Joe Cool –pw 123456
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information on changing or removing user profiles, please see “User
Profiles,” page 178.
56
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Storage Ports
If your V-Switch configuration contains SCSI devices, you can set the
storage port bus ID. If your V-Switch configuration contains FC storage
ports, you can change the default configuration of each port. Use the CLI
command interface showto show all storage port connections.
Table 12:
V Switch Interfaces
Name Description
Type
Alias Phys Address
RS232
cons RS232 Management cons 000000000000
Int
ETHERNET mgmt
Fast Ethernet
Manage
mgmt 000000000000
FibreChannel fc1
FibreChannel fc2
FC MMF
FC MMF
fc1 000000000000
fc2 000000000000
SCSI1 000000000000
SCSI2 000000000000
SCSI
SCSI
SCSI1
SCSI2
SCSI Ultra 3
SCSI Ultra 3
ETHERNET eth1 Gigabit Ethernet eth1 00081a000110
Net
ETHERNET eth2 Gigabit Ethernet eth2 00081a000111
Net
ETHERNET eth3 Gigabit Ethernet eth3 00081a000112
Net
Viewing SCSI Storage Ports and Bus IDs
Use the CLI command pscsi showto view all SCSI storage ports and their
corresponding SCSI bus ID.
pscsi show
Alias
BusID
12
pscsi3
pscsi4
7
Setting a SCSI Storage Port Bus ID
Each storage port connected to a SCSI device must have a SCSI bus ID. Use
the CLI command pscsi set busidto set a storage port’s SCSI bus ID.
pscsi set busid
You need to define two parameters to set a storage port SCSI bus ID:
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
pscsi3
INTERFACE
STORAGE PORT
NUMBER
MANDATORY
-id
12
IDENTITY
SCSI BUS
IDENTITY
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 7
Example
Storage port 3, pscsi3, is assigned SCSI bus ID 12.
pscsi set busid –if pscsi3 –id 12
Viewing the FC Port Information
Use the CLI command fc interface showto view all FC ports on the V-
Switch; their World Wide Port Names (WWPN) and administrative and
operative types.
fc interface show
Alias WWPN
Connect Oper
Mode Type
Speed
fc1
fc2
20:00:00:20:38:11:34:78 Provate NlPort 1Gbs
20:00:00:20:38:00:10:64 Private nlPort 1Gbs
Configuring an FC Storage Port
The V-Switch default configuration for FC connections is 1 GB nl port in a
public loop. If you want to change the default configuration, each storage
port connected to an FC device can be reconfigured to change the
connection speed, port type and connection mode. Use the CLI command
fc set to change the FC storage port communication speed; the port type
or connection mode.
fc set
You need to define four parameters to reconfigure an FC port:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
fc2
INTERFACE
STORAGE PORT
MANDATORY
-sp
-pt
1
SPEED
FC
OPTIONAL
AUTO: 0
1 GB: 1
2 GB: 2
COMMUNICATION
SPEED
nl
PORT TYPE
TYPE OF FC PORT
OPTIONAL
N OR NL
58
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-cm
private
CONNECTION MODE
OPTIONAL
FAB: FABRIC
PRL: PRIVATE
LOOP
PUL: PUBLIC
LOOP
Example
fc set –if fc2 –sp 1 –pt nl –cm prl
Viewing the V-Switch World Wide Node Name
Use the CLI command fc node showto view the V-Switch World Wide
Node Name (WWNN).
fc node show
Name
V-Switch1
Description
SW Version 1.5, build 5,patch 0
Board version 1, PCB version
WWNN
20:00:20:10:58:00:10:46
Gateway
Function
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Network Ports
To connect the V-Switch to the network you need to assign IP parameters
to each 1Gb Ethernet network port connected to a network. Each network
port must be located on a separate subnet. Each network port can have
more than one IP address. Use the CLI command ip config set to
assign IP parameters. Once configured, each network port will provide an
access point for hosts to the storage network. Once access is gained, a host
will be able to read from and/or write into the storage network.
Each network port
must be located on a
separate subnet.
Each network port
can have more than
one IP address.
ip config set
You need to define three parameters to configure each network port:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.56
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS
ASSIGNING TO THE
MANDATORY
Executing this
command on the
same network port
with a different IP
address will not reset
the network port
INTERFACE PORT
-if
eth1
INTERFACE ALIAS
OR NAME
NETWORK
MANDATORY
ETH1, ETH2,
ETH3
INTERFACE PORT
address. It will add
another IP address to
the network port
-im
IP MASK
ACTIVITY
IP NET MASK
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
255.255.255.0
-act
1
IF IP ADDRESS IS
ACTIVE TO EXPOSE
VOLUMES. USE
INACTIVE STATUS
TO ALLOW
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 1
(ACTIVE)
2 (INACTIVE)
FAILOVER.
For regular port activity, use the default active port setting. The inactive
port setting is used when configuring a V-Switch cluster. If you are
configuring a V-Switch cluster, each IP address must be configured on both
V-Switches in the V-Switch cluster. For more information on V-Switch
clusters, see “Introduction to V-Switch Clusters,” page 72.
Example:
The IP address 212.199.43.56 is assigned to the 1 Gb Ethernet port Eth1.
ip config set –ip 212.199.43.56 –if eth1 –act 1
60
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212.199.43.56
Figure 28.
Ethernet Port 1 IP Address
Checking the IP Configurations
After setting the management and network port IP addresses, you can use
the CLI command ip config showto access the IP Configuration Table
and view all assigned port IP addresses.
ip config show
Table 13:
V-Switch IP Configuration Table
If Name IP Address
Net Mask
Activity
Active
mgmt
eth1
eth1
eth2
eth3
eth3
212.199.43.46
212.199.43.56
212.199.43.57
212.199.75.66
212.199.12.67
212.199.12.70
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
Active
Inactive
Active
Inactive
Active
212.199.43.46
212.199.75.66
212.199.43.56
212.199.43.57
212.199.12.67
212.199.12.70
Figure 29.
V-Switch IP Adresses
Removing an IP Address
Network ports can have multiple IP addresses. You can remove an IP
address that is no longer relevant from a network port using the CLI
command ip config remove. You can remove the last network IP
address from a port, but you cannot remove the management IP address
from Eth1. If you are working in a cluster, the IP address must be
removed from both V-Switch databases. For more information on V-
Switch clusters, see “Introduction to V-Switch Clusters,” page 72.
An IP address that
has a portal
configured on it
cannot be removed.
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ip config remove
You need to define one parameter to remove a network port IP address:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.12.70
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS TO
REMOVE FROM THE
NETWORK
MANDATORY
INTERFACE PORT
Example:
The IP address 212.199.12.70 is removed from Eth3 leaving the port with
only one IP address, 212.199.12.67.
ip config remove –ip 212.199.12.70
212.199.43.46
212.199.75.66
212.199.43.56
212.199.43.57
212.199.12.67
Figure 30.
Ethernet Port 3 with One IP Address
62
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Discovering iSCSI Targets
iSCSI target discovery is performed across the IP-SAN by the iSCSI initiator
located on the server. The V-Switch supports three methods for reporting
iSCSI targets in the IP-SAN to iSCSI initiators:
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
iSCSI Discovery Session
SLP
iSNS
iSCSI Discovery Session
The V-Switch supports iSCSI discovery sessions for reporting iSCSI targets
to iSCSI initiators. A V-Switch network IP address must be configured on
the iSCSI initiator for the initiator to connect to and discover the V-Switch’s
attached iSCSI targets.
SLP
The V-Switch supports Service Location Protocol (SLP) by acting as an SLP
Service Agent (SA). No configuration is necessary. An SLP SA services
User Agents (UAs). UAs are iSCSI initiators that query a network for all
attached iSCSI targets. The V-Switch supports the specific service
service:iscsi:target.
iSNS
The V-Switch supports Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) protocol for
advertising its targets and portals on the iSNS server to enable iSCSI
initiators in the IP-SAN to locate the V-Switch targets automatically. Use
the CLI command ip isns addto add an iSCSI server to the V-Switch’s
iSNS client. Targets defined by the V-Switch’s Access Control List (ACL) as
having controlled access are accessible only to those servers defined as
having access to the target. See “Volume Exposure & Security,” page 107.
ip isns add
You need to define one parameter to add an iSNS server address:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.1
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
ISNS SERVER
MANDATORY
Use the CLI command ip isns show to view all added iSCSI server
addresses.
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ip isns show
Table 14:
iSNS Servers
212.199.56.45
Deleting an iSNS Server
Use the CLI command ip isns remove to remove an iSNS server from the V-
Switch iSNS client.
ip isns remove
You need to define one parameter to remove an iSNS server address:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.1
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
ISNS SERVER
MANDATORY
Configuring iSCSI Portals
To enable communication between iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets you
need to assign a portal to the iSCSI protocol transport. Use the CLI
command iscsi portal createto create an iSCSI portal. A portal is
the coupling of an IP address and a TCP port. Once created, a portal is
opened automatically during a communication session. If you are
working in a V-Switch cluster, each portal must be created on both V-
Switches in the V-Switch cluster. For more information on V-Switch
clusters, see “Introduction to V-Switch Clusters,” page 72.
Do not create an
iSCSI portal on the
management IP
address.
The V-Switch
supports a maximum
of 100 portals.
iscsi portal create
You need to define two parameters to configure an iSCSI portal:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.66
IP ADDRESS
USER-ASSIGNED
NETWORK PORT IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-p
TCP PORT
TCP PORT
THROUGH WHICH
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
3260
THE ISCSI
PROTOCOL PASSES
Example:
An iSCSI portal is created using the default TCP port 3260 for the IP address
212.199.43.66.
64
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iscsi portal create –ip 212.199.43.66
Viewing iSCSI Portals
You can view all created portals using the CLI command iscsi portal
show.
iscsi portal show
Table 15:
iSCSI Portals
Address Type
ipv 4
Protocol
Address
Port
3260
3260
5003
5003
6
6
6
6
212.199.43.56
212.199.43.57
212.199.43.66
212.199.43.67
ipv 4
ipv 4
ipv 4
Protocol 6 is the transport protocol for iSCSI. Address type IPv 4 designates
a four byte IP address.
Removing iSCSI Portals
You can remove an iSCSI portal using the CLI command iscsi portal
remove. Only after all iSCSI portals related to an IP address are removed
from a port can the IP address be removed from the port. If you are
working in a cluster, the portal must be removed from both V-Switch
databases. For more information on V-Switch clusters, see “Introduction to
V-Switch Clusters,” page 72.
iscsi portal remove
You need to define two parameters to remove an iSCSI portal:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.67
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
NETWORK PORT
MANDATORY
-p
5003
TCP PORT
TCP PORT FOR
ISCSI
COMMUNICATION
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
3260
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring IP Routing
To enable communications between the V-Switch and IP networks located
outside the V-Switch LAN, you must configure IP routing paths for each
external network port. The IP route begins with a specified network port on
the V-Switch and ends at the external network IP address. Just as each IP
address is unique, each IP routing path is unique. There can be only one IP
route to a given external network IP address per V-Switch.
In Figure 31, page 68, you have two V-Switches connected to three different
LANs (A, B, C). In turn, each LAN is connected to at least one external
network (D, E, F).
On V-Switch 1, network ports Eth1 and Eth2 can both access Network D:
PORT
ETH1
ETH2
LAN
A
ROUTER LEG
20.20.10.20
30.30.20.20
You can configure
only one IP route to a
given external
network on your V-
Switch.
B
Only one of these paths can be configured for V-Switch 1.
Clou
Network E
10.11.30.0
NetCwloourk F
Network D
10.10.20.0
R
10.12.40.0
12.11.20.20
R
R
30.30.20.20
D B
20.22.11.11
20.20.10.20
D A
Etherne
Etherne
Etherne
LAN B
LAN C
LAN A
V Switch 1
V Switch 2
Figure 31.
IP Routing Options
66
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding an IP Route
You can enable communications to networks outside of your LAN by
configuring an IP routing path. This allows volume access to hosts located
on external networks. Use the CLI command ip route addto add an IP
routing path to your V-Switch. If you are working in a V-Switch cluster,
you must configure the IP route on both V-Switches in the V-Switch cluster.
For more information on V-Switch clusters, see “Introduction to V-Switch
Clusters,” page 72.
ip route add
You need four parameters to configure an IP routing path.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-dip
10.10.20.0
DESTINATION IP
IP OF HOST
NETWORK
MANDATORY
-dmask
-gw
255.255.255.0
30.30.20.20
DESTINATION
MASK
IP MASK OF HOST
NETWORK
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE GATEWAY
ROUTER
-if
eth2
INTERFACE
ALIAS
NETWORK PORT TO
OPEN
MANDATORY
COMMUNICATION
THROUGH
Example:
An IP routing path to Network D, IP 10.10.20.0, (IP mask 255.255.255.0) is
mapped from network port Eth2 through router gateway 30.30.20.20.
ip route add –dip 10.10.20.0 –dmask 255.255.255.0 –gw
30.30.20.20 –if eth2
Setting a Default Gateway
You can set a default gateway for Eth1 for working with your local
gateway. This gateway is used for any IP address not specified in the V-
Switch routing table. Use the CLI command ip route default to set
the default gateway IP address for Eth1. To change the default gateway,
repeat the command with the new default gateway IP address.
ip route default
You need one parameter to configure a default IP routing path.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-gw
20.20.10.20
GATEWAY
IP ADDRESS OF
DEFAULT GATEWAY
MANDATORY
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ip route default –gw 20.20.10.20
Checking IP Routes
After creating an IP routing path, you can ping any IP-connected device
from the V-Switch Eht1 to check that the routing is configured correctly.
Use the CLI command ping to ping an IP address from the V-Switch.
Make sure that the route is defined on the other side as well.
ping
You need one parameter to check an IP routing path from the V-Switch.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
172.17.200.69
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS TO
PING
MANDATORY
ping –ip 172.17.200.69
Viewing IP Routes
After creating an IP routing path to an external network, you can view it
and any other configured IP routing path. Use the CLI command ip
route show to view a V-Switch’s routing table.
ip route show
Table 16:
V-Switch IP Routing Paths
Dest Mask Interface Gateway
Dest IP
Address
TOS
10.10.20.20 255.255.255.0 Eth2
10.12.40.40 255.255.255.0 Eth3
30.30.20.20
20.22.11.11
Removing an IP Route
You can remove unwanted IP routing paths from your V-Switch. Use the
CLI command ip route removeto remove an IP routing path. If you are
working in a V-Switch cluster, the IP route must be removed from both V-
Switch databases. For more information on V-Switch clusters, see
“Introduction to V-Switch Clusters,” page 72.
68
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ip route remove
You need three parameters to remove an IP routing path.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-dip
10.12.40.0
DESTINATION IP
IP OF HOST
STATION
MANDATORY
-dmask
-if
255.255.255.0
eth3
DESTINATION
MASK
IP MASK OF HOST
STATION
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
INTERFACE
ALIAS
NETWORK PORT TO
OPEN
COMMUNICATION
THROUGH
Example:
The routing path to destination network IP 10.12.40.0 (IP mask
255.255.255.0) is removed from network port Eth3.
ip route remove –dip 10.12.40.0 –dmask 255.255.255.0 –if
eth3
You have now configured all basic V-Switch parameters. If you are
creating a V-Switch cluster, continue with “Configuring a Cluster,” page
276. If you are still working with a single V-Switch, you can now begin
creating virtual volumes. Continue with “Volume Configuration,” page 83.
Chapter 4: V-Switch Configuration
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Notes
70
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
V-Switch Cluster Configuration
You can configure a V-Switch cluster using two V-Switches of the
same type. A cluster is a group of storage units and switches that
function as one unit for virtualization and provide high
availability in the event of V-Switch failover.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
INTRODUCTION TO V-
SWITCH CLUSTERS
A cluster can be configured between two V-Switches using CLI or
SANRAD’s StoragePro management GUI. We recommend using
StoragePro for its simplicity of use, particularly for cluster
configuration. For more information on configuring a cluster
using StoragePro, consult the StoragePro User Manual and on-line
help system. If you prefer to use CLI, continue with this chapter.
CONFIGURING A V-
SWITCH CLUSTER
MANAGING A CLUSTER
If your network still contains only one V-Switch, you can skip this
chapter and continue with Chapter 7 “Volume Exposure &
Security,” page 105.
Chapter 5: V-Switch Cluster Configuration
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to V-Switch Clusters
Two V-Switches can be concurrently connected to the same FC storage
devices to balance volume exposure thus creating a V-Switch cluster. In a
cluster, each V-Switch interacts in an active-active, peer-to-peer fashion
with the other V-Switch, or neighbor, in the cluster. No one V-Switch must
be configured specially to act as the master V-Switch in the cluster
providing higher flexibility in building a cluster.
All virtual volumes are accessible to each V-Switch and the exposing V-
Switch is defined per volume.
In Figure 32, page 73, two V-Switches are connected to one FC JBOD. From
the four physical disks, two virtual volumes have been created, both equally
accessible to both V-Switches.
Both V-Switches are also connected to two hosts via the IP SAN. The
volume exposure of the two virtual volumes is balanced equally between
the two V-Switches. Volume 1 is exposed via V-Switch 1 to Host 1,
represented by the orange dashed line. Volume 2 is exposed via V-Switch
2 to Host 2, represented by the purple dotted line.
SANRAD V-Switches
are both fully
operational in a
cluster. No V-Switch
must sit in stand-by
mode.
The volume exposure is balanced equally between the two V-Switches
with one volume exposed on each V-Switch for best resource utilization.
72
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Vol 1
Vol 2
iSCSI
initiator
iSCSI
initiator
Host 1
Host 2
IP1,Target 1
IP2,Target 2
IP SAN
IP1-active
IP2-inactive
IP2-active
IP1-inactive
When creating a
cluster, it is
V Switch 1
V Switch 2
recommended that
the same port on
each V-Switch is
used to connect to
the same FC storage
device. This
iSCSI Target 1
iSCSI Target 2
wwui2
wwui1
Vol 1
LU0
Vol 2
LU0
increases the chance
of the storage device
receiving the same
default storage
JBOD
Disk 1
Disk 2
number on both V-
Switches during their
auto-discovery
Disk 3
Disk 4
cycles. This, in turn,
makes cluster
configuration easier.
Figure 32.
V-Switch Cluster Configuration
Clusters also provide high availability in the event of V-Switch failover.
Each network port on the V-Switch is configured with its own active, or
functioning, IP addresses as well as inactive, or dormant, neighbor IP
addresses. If one V-Switch goes off-line, the remaining V-Switch activates
its neighbor’s IP addresses. The hosts continue to access volume targets
through the same IP address without sensing that their ‘regular’ V-Switch
has gone offline or noticing any impact on storage performance.
When working in a
cluster, the V-Switch
can support a
maximum of 100
portals: 50 active
and 50 inactive.
When working with FC RAID controllers, it is imperative that all LUNs in
the RAID controller are simultaneously exposed through all ports
connected to both V-Switches for the V-Switches to provide high
availability during a V-Switch failover.
Chapter 5: V-Switch Cluster Configuration
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Figure 33, V-Switch 1 has gone off-line. V-Switch 2 activates V-Switch 1’s
IP address and takes over exposure of Volume 1 to Host 1, represented by
the orange dashed line.
Host 1 continues to access Volume 1 through the same IP address as it did
before its V-Switch went off-line. Host 1 has no way of knowing that its
regular V-Switch is off-line. Host 1’s storage performance is not impacted
by the off-line V-Switch.
Vol 1
Vol 2
iSCSI
initiator
iSCSI
initiator
Host 1
Host 2
IP1,Target 1
IP2,Target 2
IP SAN
IP1-inactive
IP2-inactive
IP2-active
IP1-active
V Switch 1
V Switch 2
iSCSI Target 1
iSCSI Target 2
wwui2
wwui1
Vol 1
LU0
Vol 2
LU0
JBOD
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Disk 4
Figure 33.
Re-routing Storage Access with Off-line V-Switch
74
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring a V-Switch Cluster
Setting the V-Switch ID
When you configure a cluster, you must give each V-Switch a different
device ID for proper cluster functioning. Use the CLI command device
setto configure the V-Switch ID for each V-Switch.
device set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
1
V-SWITCH ID
ID OF V-SWITCH
IN A CLUSTER
MANDATORY IN
A CLUSTER
EACH V-SWITCH
MUST HAVE A
0 OR 1
DIFFERENT ID
Example:
There are two V-Switches in a cluster. In V-Switch 1 the ID is set to 1.
device set –id 1
In V-Switch 2 the ID is set to 0.
device set –id 0
Adding a Neighbor
When you configure a cluster, you must tell each V-Switch that it has a
neighbor and how to contact its neighbor. Use the CLI command
neighbor add to inform each V-Switch of its neighbor.
All CLI names and
aliases are case
sensitive.
You must inform each V-Switch of its neighbor in a cluster. That means
that you must tell V-Switch 1 of V-Switch 2 and V-Switch 2 of V-Switch 1.
When creating a cluster, first ensure that you have configured all IP
addresses in the correct active/inactive phase as well as portals and IP
routes on both V-Switches. For more information on configuring the V-
Switch, see “V-Switch Configuration,” page 47.
Chapter 5: V-Switch Cluster Configuration
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
neighbor add
You need to define two parameters to notify a V-Switch of a neighbor.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
VSwitch2
NEIGHBOR
ALIAS OF NEIGHBOR
TO ADD TO
MANDATORY
CLUSTER
-ip
212.199.43.75
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
MGMT PORT ON
NEIGHBOR
MANDATORY
Example:
A V-Switch is informed that it has a neighbor, VSwitch2, and that it can
establish communication with VSwitch2 via IP address 212.199.43.75.
neighbor add –nb VSwitch2 –ip 212.199.43.75
76
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All V-Switch
database
Vol 1
Vol 2
iSCSI
initiator
iSCSI
initiator
configurations must
be replicated in both
V-Switches when
creating a V-Switch
cluster, including IP
addresses, portals,
IP routes, volumes
and targets.
Host 1
Host 2
IP1,Target 1
IP2,Target 2
IP: 212.199.43.90
IP: 212.199.43.75
IP SAN
IP1-active: 212.199.43.90
IP2-inactive: 212.199.43.75
IP2-active: 212.199.43.75
IP1-inactive: 212.199.43.90
V Switch 1
V Switch 2
iSCSI Target 1
wwui1
iSCSI Target 2
wwui2
Vol 1
LU0
Vol 2
LU0
JBOD 1
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 4
Disk 3
Figure 34.
Cluster with Neighbor IP Addresses
Chapter 5: V-Switch Cluster Configuration
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with SCSI Storage Devices
The V-Switch default SCSI bus ID is 7. If your storage cluster includes SCSI
storage devices, one of the V-Switch’s default SCSI bus ID must be changed.
They cannot both be 7 on the same SCSI bus. Use the CLI command pscsi
set busid to change the SCSI bus ID on one of the V-Switches.
pscsi set busid
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
pscsi3
INTERFACE
STORAGE PORT
NUMBER/ALIAS
MANDATORY
-id
12
ID
PSCSI ID NUMBER
BETWEEN 0 AND 15
MANDATORY
Example
pscsi set busid if pscsi3 –id 12
Maintaining Cluster Communications
Once a V-Switch knows that it has a neighbor, it begins sending out a
regular keep alive signal to its neighbor that it is on-line. The V-Switch also
begins listening for the keep alive signal from its neighbor. The keep alive
signal is transmitted through all connecting paths between each neighbor.
Thus, if one path fails, the remaining path(s) will still carry the keep alive
signal.
If a specified time period passes without a keep alive signal from the
neighbor, a suspicious interval, measured in seconds, is entered. The V-
Switch suspects that its neighbor has gone off-line and begins preparing to
activate the neighbor IP addresses to take over volume exposure.
If a keep alive signal is received during the suspicious interval, the timer is
reset and the V-Switch continues to function as usual. If a keep alive signal
is not received by the end of the suspicious interval, a dead interval is
entered. At the end of the dead interval, the neighboring V-Switch is
considered off-line, the failover process is initiated and the on-line V-Switch
actives the neighbor IP addresses and takes over volume exposure.
Use the CLI command cluster showto view the keep alive parameters of
a cluster.
cluster show
Last Keep Alive KeepAlive Int(s)Susp Int(s) Dead Int(s)
1
2
6
10
78
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
Every 2 seconds V-Switch 1 sends out a keep alive signal. If, after 6 seconds
from the last keep alive signal, V-Switch 1 does not receive another keep
alive signal from its neighbor, it enters a suspicious interval. If, after 10
seconds from the last keep alive signal, V-Switch 1 enters a dead interval
and begins activating the failover process.
Enabling and Disabling Failover
Once you have configured your cluster parameters, you need to enable the
failover functionality. Use the CLI command cluster failover
enableto enable this functionality. This command must be executed on
both V-Switches in the cluster.
cluster failover enable
If you want to break a cluster or need to take a V-Switch off-line, you must
first disable V-Switch failover. Use the CLI command cluster failover
disableto disable this functionality. This command must be executed on
both V-Switches in the cluster.
cluster failover disable
Further V-Switch Cluster Configurations
After configuring neighbor parameters on each V-Switch, you need to
configure identical volume configuration and exposure details on each V-
Switch in the cluster. Please refer to “Volume Configuration,” page 81, for
information on configuring volumes. Please refer to “Volume Exposure &
Security,” page 105, for information on exposing volumes.
Please refer to “Configuring a Cluster,” page 272, for a working example of
a full cluster configuration.
Chapter 5: V-Switch Cluster Configuration
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing V-Switch Neighbor Details
Use the CLI command neighbor show to view the neighbor configured
on a V-Switch.
neighbor show
Table 16:
Neighbors in a Cluster
IP Address UDP SNMP Timeout SNMP # of
Name
(msec) Retries
VSwitch2 212.199.43.75 161
Use the CLI command neighbor detailsto list the details of a neighbor
in a cluster.
neighbor details
You need to define one parameter to list neighbor details.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
VSwitch2
NEIGHBOR
ALIAS OF NEIGHBOR
IN CLUSTER
MANDATORY
Table 17:
Neighbor Details
Neighbor Name
IP Address
VSwitch2
212.199.43.75
Last Received Keep Alive:
Status
3
Alive
srOpen
Lock Status
A neighbor’s status can be alive, suspicious or dead. The lock status can be
open, master lock or slave lock. The lock status is not currently
configurable and the default status is open.
80
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing a Cluster
If you modify a V-Switch alias or management IP address, you must
implement the updates in the neighboring V-Switch. Use the CLI command
neighbor setto update a V-Switch on changes in its neighbor.
neighbor set
You need to define the parameter(s) to modify to reset a neighbor alias or IP
address in a cluster.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
VSwitch2
NEIGHBOR ALIAS
NEIGHBORING V-
SWITCH IN
OPTIONAL
CLUSTER
-ip
212.199.43.75
NEIGHBOR
MANAGEMENT IP
OF THE
OPTIONAL
MANAGEMENT IP
ADDRESS
NEIGHBORING V-
SWITCH
Use the CLI command neighbor removeto remove a neighbor from a
cluster.
neighbor remove
You need to define two parameters to remove a neighbor.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
VSwitch2
NEIGHBOR ALIAS
NEIGHBORING V-
SWITCH IN
MANDATORY
CLUSTER
-ip
NEIGHBOR
MANAGEMENT IP
OF THE
MANDATORY
MANAGEMENT IP
ADDRESS
NEIGHBORING V-
SWITCH
Chapter 5: V-Switch Cluster Configuration
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the CLI command cluster setto modify the default keep alive
intervals.
cluster set
You need to define the parameters you want to modify in the keep alive
interval.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-kai
5
KEEP ALIVE
INTERVAL
TIME BETWEEN
ALIVE SIGNALS
FROM NEIGHBORS
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 2 SEC
-sint
-fint
10
10
SUSPICIOUS
INTERVAL
TIME FROM WHEN A
SIGNAL WAS
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 6 SEC
EXPECTED BUT NOT
RECEIVED
FAILOVER INTERVAL
TIME WHEN
SUSPICIOUS
INTERVAL IS
EXCEEDED
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
10 SEC
82
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Volume Configuration
After you have configured the V-Switch general parameters, you
can begin defining the storage topology using the Volume Manager.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
Using the Volume Manager, you can create subdisks on physical
disk storage devices or leave the physical disk as is. These physical
volumes can then be used to create the following types of virtual
volumes:
INTRODUCTION TO
VOLUME
CONFIGURATION
IDENTIFYING
AVAILABLE STORAGE
DEVICES
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Transparent
Simple
CREATING A
TRANSPARENT
VOLUME
Concatenated
Striped
CREATING A SUBDISK
(LUN CARVING)
CREATING A SIMPLE
VOLUME
Mirrored
CREATING A
CONCATENATED
VOLUME
RAID 10 and 0+1
CREATING A STRIPED
VOLUME
CREATING A
MIRRORED VOLUME
CREATING A RAID 10
AND RAID 0+1
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to Volume Configuration
This chapter describes how to identify the SAN storage devices and use
them to create subdisks and virtual volumes. Each description includes:
ꢁ
ꢁ
A general description and generic diagram.
The basic command, switches and parameters needed to execute
the command.
ꢁ
An example of how to use the command with an accompanying
diagram.
The specific examples used in this chapter contain two JBODs; each JBOD
having four disks, each with a volume of 18 GB. See the example in
Figure 35.
The Volume Manager names all disks automatically during the auto-
discovery process. For FC, this name includes FC disk’s World Wide Unique
Identifier (WWUI) serial number. For SCSI, this name includes the SCSI disk
port number and SCSI bus ID. This name is important in identifying disks
for re-creating volume hierarchies on both V-Switches in a cluster.
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 6
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Figure 35.
Physical Storage used in Examples
If you are working in a V-Switch cluster, you need to configure all subdisks
and volumes on both V-Switches in the V-Switch cluster. For more
information on V-Switch clusters, see “Introduction to V-Switch Clusters,”
page 72.
84
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying Available Storage Devices
Before beginning to configure virtual volumes, you need to know which
storage devices are available. Use the CLI command storage show to
show the available storage devices and their corresponding aliases needed
to configure volumes
The V-Switch
supports a maximum
of 512 disks.
storage show
Table 18:
Storage Devices
Alias
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Type
Stor_1
Stor_2
Stor_3
Stor_4
500507606058c900 0 Enabled
2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
2000002037c32450 0 Enabled
entire
entire
entire
entire
Enabled operating status denotes an attached and functioning storage
device. Storage is missing denotes that a storage device was previously
registered and has since lost its connection to the V-Switch.
If a subdisk has been created on a disk, the subdisk status in the disk details
will display split. If no subdisks were created, the subdisk status will
display entire. See “storage details,” page 87.
The V-Switch automatically generates and assigns storage aliases as each
device is discovered. Use the CLI command storage blink activate
to identify the actual physical device for an alias.
Not all storage
devices are able to
support this feature.
storage blink activate
You need to define two parameters to blink a storage device:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Stor_1
STORAGE DEVICE
ALAIS OF DEVICE
TO BLINK
MANDATORY
-t
120
TIME
LENGTH OF TIME TO
BLINK DEVICE
OPTIONAL
1-3600 SEC
0=FOREVER
DEFAULT: 0
Example:
The storage device, Stor_1, is set to blink for two minutes (one hundred and
twenty seconds) to allow it to be identified.
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
storage blink activate –s Stor_1 –t 120
Use the CLI command storage blink abortto stop the blinking before
the end of the set time.
storage blink abort
You need to define one parameter to stop blinking a storage device:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Stor_1
STORAGE DEVICE
ALAIS OF DEVICE
TO BLINK
MANDATORY
Once a storage device has been identified, use the CLI command storage
setto change the device alias or include helpful information on the device.
storage set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Stor_1
STORAGE ALIAS
STORAGE ALIAS TO
MODIFY
MANDATORY
-na
Disk2JBOD5
NEW ALIAS
NEW ALIAS FOR
STORAGE
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
-info
save_for_snap
shots
INFORMATION
INFORMATION ON
STORAGE TO SET
Example:
The alias of Stor_1 is changed to Disk2JBOD5 for easier identification and it
is noted to save the disk for snapshots.
storage set –s Stor_1 –na Disk2JBOD5 –info save_for_snap
shots
The V-Switch supports write cache enabling for increased performance.
Use the CLI command storage disk setto enable or disable the write
cache.
storage disk set
You need to define two parameters to change a device’s write cache setting:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-d
Disk2JBOD5
DISK
DISK DEVICE
MANDATORY
-wce
yes
WRITE CACHE
ENABLED
WRITE CACHE
FUNCTION
MANDATORY
YES OR NO
86
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The V-Switch also recognizes all write-protected storage devices. Use the
CLI command storage detailsto view a device’s details, including if it
is write-protected.
storage details
You need to define one parameter to view a disk’s details:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Disk2JBOD5
STORAGE
ALIAS OF STORAGE
TO VIEW
MANDATORY
Table 19:
Storage Details
Alias:
Disk2JBOD5
Entity Name: 2000002037a9551e
LUN(Logical Unit Number) 0000000000000000
Vendor Name:
SEAGATE
Additional Info:
Transport type:
Oper. Status:
Fiber Channel
Enabled
Time since last Update:
8 days 3h:12m:16 sec 37
(1/60 Sec)
SCSI Version:
Revision Level:
Product Id:
3
0002ST336704FC
ST336704FC
Serial Number:
Number Of Blocks:
Block Size:
3CD0FHA400002108XYGLXYGL
71687369
512
SubDisks:
Entire
true
Write Cache Enabled:
Write Protected
Volume
false
sim
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Transparent Volume
You can take a physical disk and its existing configured storage data and
convert it to a directly accessible, or transparent, virtual volume using the
CLI command volume create transparent. A transparent volume is
ready for direct host exposure. Please refer to “Volume Exposure &
Security,” page 107.
Transparent volumes
cannot be used in
further volume
hierarchies.
Tape devices must
be virtualized as
transparent volumes.
Certain vendor storage devices have vendor-specific SCSI commands. To
support these SCSI commands, you can convert these storage devices and
their contained data to transparent volumes.
This is useful if you have a functioning and fully configured RAID module
that you want to use ’as is’. All RAID configurations will be maintained in
the transparent volume.
volume create transparent
You need to define two parameters to create a transparent volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
–vol
Trans1
VOLUME ALIAS
USER-ASSIGNED
ALIAS FOR THE
VOLUME
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
STORAGE ALIAS
-d
Disk1
DISK ALIAS
ALIAS GIVEN TO
THE DISK DURING
DISK AUTO-
MANDATORY
DISCOVERY
Example:
In Figure 36, page 89, the logical unit, LUN0 on Disk 1, is converted
directly to a virtual transparent volume, Transparent 1. This RAID device
has only one LUN. For each LUN configured on a RAID device, the V-
Switch registers a disk. Therefore, a RAID device with five LUNs will
appear to the V-Switch as five disks.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
volume create transparent –vol Trans1 –d Disk1
88
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trasparent
Volume 1
Disk 1, LUN0
RAID Controller
Figure 36.
Transparent Volume 1
After creating the transparent volume, you can use the CLI command
volume show to verify the volume creation.
volume show
Table 20:
Volume Details
Alias
Vol Type # of Blocks Block Size
State
Trans1 Transpar
1024
512
Internal
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Subdisk (LUN Carving)
You can create one or more subdisks on a physical disk. The subdisks can
then be converted to simple volumes to be used for creating concatenated,
striped and mirrored virtual volumes. When you create a subdisk, only
the defined area is converted into a subdisk. You must individually
convert each disk area into a subdisk for the physical volume to be usable
by the Volume Manager.
The V-Switch
supports a maximum
of 512 subdisks.
Disk
Disk
Disk
Subdisk 1
Subdisk 2
Subdisk n
Simple 1
Simple 2
Simple n
Figure 37.
subdisk create
You need to define four parameters to create a subdisk
Partitioning a Physical Volume
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-d
Disk1
DISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF DISK TO
SPLIT
MANDATORY
–sl
–sa
18000000
0
SPLIT LENGTH
LENGTH IN
BLOCKS OF
SUBDISK
MANDATORY
(1 BLOCK =
512 BYTES)
START ADDRESS
BLOCK TO BEGIN
COUNTING THE
SUBDISK LENGTH
FROM
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 0
–sd
Subdisk1
SUBDISK ALIAS
USER-ASSIGNED
ALIAS FOR SUBDISK
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
DEF_SPLIT_
CLUSTER NO_
DISK NO_END
ADDRESS IN
BLOCKS
Example:
In Figure 38, page 91, you see Disk 1 before a subdisk is created on it.
90
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 6
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Figure 38.
Disk 1 before Subdisk
In Figure Error! Bookmark not defined., page Error! Bookmark not
defined., Subdisk 1 has been created on Disk 1. The subdisk is 18,000,000
blocks long (9 GB). The Volume Manager begins counting the 18,000,000
blocks from block 0.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
subdisk create –d Disk1 –sl 18000000 –sa 0 –sd Subdisk1
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 6
Disk 1
Subdisk 1
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Figure 39.
Disk 1 with 1 Subdisk
After creating the subdisk, you can use the CLI command subdisk show
to view it and all configured subdisks. You can use the CLI command
subdisk detailsto view the details of the created subdisk.
subdisk details
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need to define one parameter to view subdisks.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
DISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF DISK TO
SHOW SUBDISKS
FROM
OPTIONAL
-d
Disk1
USE THIS
SWITCH TO LIST
ONLY THE
DETAILS OF A
SPECIFIC DISK
This command calls up the following table.
Table 21:
Details of all Subdisks
Subdisk Start Address Length
Subdisk1 512
Disk
Vol
no
Disk1
0
For the rest of the physical volume on Disk 1 to be usable to the Volume
Manager, you must create another subdisk.
subdisk create –d Disk1 –sl 18000000 –sa 18000000 –sd
Subdisk2
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 6
Disk 1
Subdisk 1
Subdisk 2
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Figure 40.
Disk 1 with 2 Subdisks
92
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Simple Volume
Before you can build concatenated, mirrored and striped volumes, you
must create simple volumes from each disk or subdisk in your storage
network.
The V-Switch
supports a maximum
of 512 volumes.
A physical disk or subdisk is converted directly to a virtual simple
volume. A simple volume differs from a transparent volume in that virtual
volume hierarchies can be built on top of simple volumes but not on
transparent volumes. In Figure 41, data blocks 1 – 4 are mapped to blocks
5 – 8 of Disk 2.
Simple Volume
Virtual
B1 B2 B3 B4
Volume
Disk 1
Disk 2
S1
S5
S4
S8
S1
S5
S4
S8
S2
S3
S7
S2
S3
S7
Physical
Volume
S6
S6
S9
S12
S16
S9
S12
S16
S10
S14
S11
S15
S10
S14
S11
S15
S13
S13
Figure 41.
volume create simple
You need to define three parameters to create a Simple Volume.
Simple Volume Block Distribution
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
VOLUME
USER-ASSIGNED
NAME FOR SIMPLE
VOLUME
OPTIONAL
-vol
Simple1
DEFAULT:
(SUB)DISK ALIAS
SUBDISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF THE
MANDATORY
ASSIGN AN ALIAS
TO EITHER A
DISK OR A
-sd
Subdisk1
SUBDISK IN WHICH
TO CREATE THE
VOLUME – IF THE
PHYSCIAL DISK WAS
DIVIDED INTO
SUBDISK
SUBDISKS
DISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF THE DISK
IN WHICH TO
CREATE THE
VOLUME
MANDATORY
ASSIGN AN ALIAS
TO EITHER A
DISK OR A
-d
SUBDISK
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning a volume alias is optional. If you do not include a volume alias
in the command, the volume alias will default to the subdisk alias in
which the volume is located. For example, a simple volume created on
Subdisk 6 will be named Subdisk 6 by default.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
Use the –sdswitch to assign a subdisk or the –dswitch to assign a disk.
Example:
In Figure 42, Subdisk 1 on Disk 1 is converted to a simple volume, Simple 1.
volume create simple –vol Simple1 –sd Subdisk1
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 6
Disk 1
Simple 1
Subdisk2
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Figure 42.
Simple Volume 1
Use the CLI command volume show to show the created volume:
volume show
Alias
Type Act # of Bl Pot # of Bl Bl Size State
Simple1 Simple 17999999
17999999
512 Internal
94
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Concatenated Volume
To accommodate large volumes of data or to best utilize small volumes
spread over several disks, you can concatenate physical volumes across
storage devices to create a larger virtual volume.
The V-Switch
supports a maximum
of 512 volumes.
In Figure 43, the volume is divided into two equitable chunks to be
mapped across two disks. Data blocks 1 – 4 are mapped to Disk 1, blocks
13 – 16. Data blocks 5 – 8 are mapped to Disk 2, blocks 13 – 16.
Concatenated
Volume
B1 B2 B3 B4
Virtual
Volume
B5 B6 B7 B8
Disk 1
Disk 2
S1
S5
S4
S8
S1
S4
S8
S2
S3
S7
S2
S3
S7
Physical
Volume
S5
S9
S6
S6
S9
S12
S16
S12
S16
S10
S14
S11
S15
S10
S14
S11
S15
S13
S13
Figure 43.
Concatenated Volume Block Distribution
volume create concatenated
You need to define four parameters to create a concatenated volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
VOLUME NAME
USER-ASSIGNED
VOLUME NAME
MANDATORY
-vol
Concat1
NUMBER OF
CHILDREN
NUMBER OF
VOLUMES OR
OPTIONAL
–nbc
3
DEFAULT: 2
CHILDREN FROM
WHICH TO BUILD
STRIPED VOLUME
CHILD
CHILD
CHILD
FIRST VOLUME
(CHILD) TO
COMBINE
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
–ch
–ch
–ch
Simple5
Simple12
Simple14
SECOND VOLUME
(CHILD) TO
COMBINE
N VOLUME (CHILD)
TO COMBINE
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system default for the number of children being concatenated is two.
Therefore, you only need to specify the number of children for numbers
greater than two.
Example:
In Figure 44, Simple Volume 5 and Simple Volume 12, both built over an
entire physical disk, are concatenated to create a concatenated volume,
Concat 1. Data is read/written first to Simple 5. When the data chunk
gets to the end of Simple 5, it continues with Simple 12 reflecting the
volume order as entered in the CLI command.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
volume create concatenated –vol Concat1 –ch Simple5 –ch
Simple12
Concatenated
Volume 1
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 6
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 1
Simple 1
Simple 7
Simple 9
Simple 3
Simple 2
Simple 8
Simple 10
Simple 4
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Simple 5
Simple 6
Simple 11
Simple 12
Figure 44.
Concatenated Volume 1
96
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Striped Volume
A striped volume has data written equitably across two or more disks to
provide higher read/write rates. Subdisks within a striped volume need
to be on different disks to realize the benefits of striping. Throughput
increases with the number of disks within a striped volume.
The V-Switch
supports a maximum
of 512 volumes.
In Figure 45, data block 1 is mapped to section 1 of Disk 1; data block 2 is
mapped to block 1 of Disk 2. Each subsequent data block is then written
alternately between blocks on Disks 1 and 2. The striped unit size in this
example is one block.
Striped Volume
B1 B2 B3 B4
Virtual
Volume
B5 B6 B7 B8
Disk 1
Disk 2
S1
S5
S4
S8
S1
S5
S4
S8
S2
S3
S7
S2
S3
S7
Physical
Volume
S6
S6
S9
S12
S16
S9
S12
S16
S10
S14
S11
S15
S10
S14
S11
S15
S13
S13
Figure 45.
volume create stripe
You need to define four parameters to create a striped volume:
Striped Volume Block Distribution
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
VOLUME ALIAS
USER-GIVEN ALIAS
FOR VOLUME
CREATED
OPTIONAL
–vol
Stripe1
DEFAULT:
(SUB)DISK ALIAS
STRIPE UNIT SIZE
NUMBER OF
MANDATORY
–sus
–nbc
100
BLOCKS
READ/WRITTEN
INTO EACH VOLUME
BEFORE MOVING ON
TO THE NEXT CHILD
IN THE STRIPE
NUMBER OF
CHILDREN
NUMBER OF
VOLUMES OR
OPTIONAL
4
DEFAULT: 2
CHILDREN FROM
WHICH TO BUILD
STRIPED VOLUME
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
CHILD
FIRST VOLUME
(CHILD) TO WRITE
TO
MANDATORY
–ch
Simple2
CHILD
CHILD
CHILD
SECOND VOLUME
(CHILD) TO WRITE
TO
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
–ch
–ch
–ch
Simple4
Simple8
Simple10
THIRD VOLUME
(CHILD) TO WRITE
TO
FOURTH VOLUME
(CHILD) TO WRITE
TO
The system default for the number of children data is being striped across is
two. Therefore, you only need to specify the number of children for
numbers greater than two.
Example:
In Figure 46, page 99, a striped volume, Stripe 1, is created across four
children: Simple 2, Simple 4, Simple 8 and Simple 10. The striped unit size
is 100 blocks, meaning that in each read/write function, 100 blocks of data
are read/written into Simple 2; then 100 blocks into Simple 4;. then 100
blocks into Simple 8; then 100 blocks into Simple 10 and then back again to
100 blocks in Simple 2 until the end of the data chunk.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
volume create stripe –vol Stripe1 –nbc 4 –sus 100 –ch
Simple2 –ch Simple4 –ch Simple8 –ch Simple10
98
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Striped
Volume 1
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 6
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 1
Simple 1
Simple 7
Simple 9
Simple 3
Simple 2
Simple 8
Simple 10
Simple 4
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Simple 5
Simple 6
Simple 11
Simple 12
Figure 46.
Striped Volume 1
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Mirrored Volume
A mirrored volume is synchronously written into two or more volumes.
Mirrored volumes provide protection against data loss from a physical
disk crash. To be a true mirror and realize the full potential of a mirror,
the mirrored volumes must be located on different physical disks.
Use mirroring to
create data backups.
The V-Switch
supports a maximum
of 512 volumes.
In Figure 47, data block 1 is mapped to both block 5 on Disk 1 and block 9
on Disk 2. Data blocks 2, 3 and 4 are mapped to both blocks 6,7 and 8 on
Disk 1 and blocks 10, 11 and 12 on Disk 2.
Mirrored
Volume
Virtual
Volume
B1 B2 B3 B4
Disk 1
Disk 2
S1
S5
S4
S8
S1
S5
S4
S8
S2
S3
S7
S2
S3
S7
Physical
Volume
S6
S6
S9
S12
S16
S9
S12
S16
S10
S14
S11
S15
S10
S14
S11
S15
S13
S13
Figure 47.
Mirrored Volume Block Distribution
volume create mirror
You need to define four parameters to create a mirrored volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
VOLUME ALIAS
USER-ASSIGNED
ALAIS FOR THE
MANDATORY
–vol
Mirrored1
MIRRORED VOLUME
NUMBER OF
CHILDREN
OPTIONAL
-nbc
NUMBER OF
CHILDREN IN
DEFAULT: 2
MAX: 4
MIRRORED VOLUME
CHILD
CHILD
NAME OF EACH
MANDATORY
–ch
–ch
Simple6
CHILD TO INCLUDE
IN THE MIRROR
NAME OF EACH
MANDATORY
Simple11
CHILD TO INCLUDE
IN THE MIRROR
100
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
In Figure 48, a mirrored volume, Mirrored 1, is created using two children,
Simple 6 and Simple 11.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
volume create mirror –vol Mirrored1 –ch Simple6 –ch
Simple11
Mirrored
Volume 1
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 6
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 1
Simple 1
Simple 7
Simple 9
Simple 3
Simple 2
Simple 8
Simple 10
Simple 4
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Simple 5
Simple 6
Simple 11
Simple 12
Figure 48.
Mirrored Volume 1
Replicating Data in a Mirrored Volume
If one child of a mirrored volume, the source, already contains data, the
data can be replicated to the second child, the destination, using the CLI
command volume mirror sync. This is done on-line while the source
volume is still exposed. See how to expose volumes “Volume Exposure &
Security,” page 107.
Data can also be replicated offline using the CLI command volume copy
create. On-line data replication is slower but allows the source volume to
remain on-line with no interruption of service to the volume host(s). Off-
line replication is faster than on-line replication but both the source and
destination volumes must be off-line which can create an interruption of
service to the volume host(s).
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See the working example of off-line data replication “Replicating Data Off-
line,” page 264.
volume mirror sync
You need to define two parameters to synchronize a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
Simple3
SOURCE
VOLUME
ORIGINAL VOLUME
TO SYNCHRONIZE
TO
MANDATORY
-dst
Simple5
DESTINATION
VOLUME
NEW VOLUME TO
ADD TO
MANDATORY
SYNCHRONINZE
Example:
The online volume Simple3 is synchronized to the online volume Simple5.
volume mirror sync –src Simple3 –dst Simple5
102
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a RAID 10 and RAID 0+1
You will need two separate commands to create a RAID 10 or 0+1 volume.
RAID 10 first creates mirrored volumes and then creates a striped volume
of the mirrored volumes. This gives the advantage of both high
performance and data redundancy.
In Figure 49, page 104, in the first mirrored volume, data block 1 is mapped
to both block 1 on Disk 1 and block 1 on Disk 2. Data blocks 3, 5 and 7 are
mapped to blocks 2, 3 and 4 on both Disks 1 and 2.
In the second mirrored volume, data block 2 is mapped to both block 1 on
Disk 3 and block 1 on Disk 4. Data blocks 4, 6 and 8 are mapped to blocks 2,
3 and 4 on Disks 3 and 4.
Data blocks 1 and 2 are then compiled in a striped pattern, along with
blocks 3 – 8.
RAID 0+1 first creates striped volumes and then creates mirrored volumes
of the striped volumes.
RAID 10
Virtual
Volume
Volumes
B1 B2 B3 B4
B5 B6 B7 B8
Mirrored
Volume
Mirrored
Volume
RAID 0 - Striping
RAID 1 - Mirroring
B1 B3 B5 B7
B2 B4 B6 B8
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Disk 4
S1
S5
S4
S8
S1
S5
S4
S8
S1
S5
S4
S8
S1
S5
S4
S8
S2
S3
S7
S2
S3
S7
S2
S3
S7
S2
S3
S7
S6
S6
S6
S6
S9
S12
S16
S9
S12
S16
S9
S12
S16
S9
S12
S16
S10
S14
S11
S15
S10
S14
S11
S15
S10
S14
S11
S15
S10
S14
S11
S15
S13
S13
S13
S13
Physical
Volumes
Figure 49.
RAID 10 Volume Block Distribution
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
In Figure 51, page 105, to begin creating a RAID 10 volume, a mirrored
volume, Mirror 2, is created using two children: Simple 1 and Simple 7.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror2 –ch Simple1 –ch
Simple7
Mirrored
Volume 2
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 6
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 1
Simple 1
Simple 7
Simple 9
Simple 3
Simple 2
Simple 8
Simple 10
Simple 4
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Simple 5
Simple 6
Simple 11
Simple 12
Figure 50.
First Mirrored Volume of RAID 10
Next, in Figure 51, page 105, another mirrored volume, Mirror 3, is created
using two children: Simple 3 and Simple 9.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror3 –ch Simple3 –ch
Simple9
104
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrored
Mirrored
Volume 2
Volume 3
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 6
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 1
Simple 1
Simple 7
Simple 9
Simple 3
Simple 2
Simple 8
Simple 10
Simple 4
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Simple 5
Simple 6
Simple 11
Simple 12
Figure 51.
Second Mirrored Volume of RAID 10
Finally, in Figure 52, page 106, a striped volume, Stripe 2, is created using
the two mirrored volumes as children: Mirror 2 and Mirror 3. The striped
unit size is 100 blocks, meaning that in each read/write function, 100
blocks of data are read/written first into Mirror 2 then Mirror 3 and then
back to Mirror 2 until the end of the data chunk.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this volume must be
configured on both
V-Switches.
volume create stripe –vol Stripe2 –sus 100 –ch Mirror2 –
ch Mirror3
Chapter 6: Volume Configuration
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Striped
Volume 2
Mirrored
Mirrored
Volume 2
Volume 3
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 6
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 1
Simple 1
Simple 7
Simple 9
Simple 3
Simple 2
Simple 8
Simple 10
Simple 4
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Simple 5
Simple 6
Simple 11
Simple 12
Figure 52.
Striped Volume of RAID 10
To create a RAID 0+1 volume, invert the commands and first create a
striped volume and then mirrored volumes of the stripe.
106
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Volume Exposure & Security
After you have created your virtual volumes and storage
hierarchies, you want to expose them securely to hosts using the
iSCSI protocol. Up to this point, all volumes created are invisible
and inaccessible to network hosts.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
INTRODUCTION TO
VOLUME EXPOSURE &
SECURITY
This chapter explains how to create iSCSI targets; assign LUNs to
volumes and attach LUNs to iSCSI targets. This enables hosts with
installed iSCSI initiators to view and access the exposed volumes.
CREATING AN ISCSI
TARGET
CHANGING THE
DEFAULT IDENTITY
This chapter also explains how to create identities, assign access
rights and enable authentication methods to control iSCSI initiator
access to exposed volumes.
CREATING AN IDENTITY
ADDING INITIATORS TO
AN IDENTITY
ASSIGNING IDENTITY
CREDENTIALS
CONNECTING AN
IDENTITY AND TARGET
EXPOSING AN ISCSI
TARGET AND LUN
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to Volume Exposure & Security
iSCSI Targets
Data is able to be transferred via iSCSI when an iSCSI initiator establishes a
TCP connection with an iSCSI target.
ꢀ
The iSCSI initiator resides in the host computer and is configured
by the system administrator.
ꢀ
The iSCSI target resides in the V-Switch and is created by the
volume manager.
To enable iSCSI communications over TCP, the system administrator
configured portals during the initial V-Switch configuration, consisting of a
network port IP address and its assigned TCP port. Please see “Configuring
iSCSI Portals,” page 64 for more details. Each configured portal is
automatically attached to all iSCSI targets created. Typically, there are few
portals and many targets.
Both iSCSI initiators and targets have a World Wide Unique Identifier (WWUI)
of up to 256 free form characters, e.g. www.sanrad.vswitch1.target1.
You create a V-Switch target by assigning an alias and WWUI to it.
You assign a Logical Unit Number (LUN) to a volume and then attach the
LUN to an iSCSI target to expose the volume to hosts.
When creating targets, keep in mind that:
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Each target can have multiple LUNs.
Each target must have LU0 to be functional.
Each target should be exposed by only one V-Switch in a cluster.
Each target can be accessed by multiple hosts.
There are two ways to create a LUN and target:
ꢀ
ꢀ
Assign a LUN and create a target together.
Create targets first and later assign LUNs to the pre-created targets.
The V-Switch in Figure 53, page 109, contains three iSCSI targets: Target 1,
Target 2 and Target 3. It has two portals: (IP1, 5003) and (IP2, 5003). Target
1 and Target 2 have only one volume attached to each. Therefore, each
volume is automatically assigned LU0. Target 3 has two attached volumes,
LU0 and LU1.
108
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V-Switch
iSCSI Target 1
iSCSI Target 3
wwui3
iSCSI Target 2
wwui2
wwui1
Vol 1
LU0
Vol 2
LU0
Vol 3
LU0
Vol 4
LU1
Figure 53.
iSCSI Target Access
Once a volume has a LUN and is attached to a target, it is accessible to iSCSI
initiators. Each initiator can access, read and write into the volume.
Identities
To allow selective iSCSI initiator access to iSCSI target volumes, the V-
Switch uses identities to define pools of initiators. An identity is a user-
defined list of iSCSI initiators. An identity can contain from one to multiple
initiators, with each initiator having a unique WWUI.
wwui1
wwui2
Ident A
wwui3
wwui4
wwui5
wwui6
wwui7
wwui8
wwui9
wwui10
Figure 54.
Identity A’s iSCSI Initiators
In Figure 54, there are four iSCSI initiators in Identity A: WWUI 1, 2,5 and
8.
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wwui1
wwui2
wwui3
wwui4
wwui5
wwui6
wwui7
wwui8
wwui9
wwui10
Ident A
Ident B
An iSCSI initiator can
be listed in multiple
identities.
Figure 55.
Identity B’s iSCSI Initiators
In Figure 55, there are six iSCSI initiators in Identity B: WWUI 3, 4, 6, 7, 8
and 9. Note that iSCSI initiator 8 is in both Identity A and B. An iSCSI
initiator can be listed in multiple identities.
wwui1
wwui2
Ident A
wwui3
wwui4
wwui5
Ident B
wwui6
wwui7
wwui8
Ident C
wwui9
wwui10
Figure 56.
Identity C’s iSCSI Initiator
In Figure 56, there is only one iSCSI initiator in Identity C: WWUI10.
Identities are coupled with iSCSI targets to limit iSCSI initiator access to a
target’s underlying volumes. An identity can be used with more than one
target and each target can have more than one identity.
110
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wwui1
wwui2
wwui3
wwui4
wwui5
wwui6
wwui7
wwui8
wwui9
wwui10
Vol 1
Vol 2
iSCSI Target 1
wwui21
An identity can be
used with more than
one target.
Ident A
Ident B
Ident C
Vol 3
iSCSI Target 2
wwui22
Vol 4
iSCSI Target 3
wwui23
Vol 5
Vol 6
iSCSI Target 4
wwui24
Figure 57.
Identities Coupled with Targets
In Figure 57, Identity A is coupled with both Targets 1 and 2. Identity B is
coupled with Target 3. Identity C is coupled with Target 4. As a result,
each iSCSI initiator has access to the following volumes:
ISCSI INITIATOR
WWUI1
VOLUMES ACCESSIBLE
fVOL1
fVOL1
fVOL4
fVOL4
fVOL1
fVOL4
fVOL4
fVOL1
fVOL4
fVOL5
fVOL2
fVOL3
WWUI2
fVOL2
fVOL3
WWUI3
WWUI4
WWUI5
fVOL2
fVOL3
WWUI6
WWUI7
WWUI8
fVOL2
fVOL3
fVOL4
WWUI9
WWUI10
fVOL6
Access Rights
The creation of an identity limits the iSCSI initiators able to access an iSCSI
target and its underlying volumes. Now, you want to define the access
rights for each identity-target pair. When you couple an identity and target,
you assign access rights: read-write (RW), read-only (RO) or not accessible
(NA). The access rights are per identity-target pair. An identity can be
coupled with multiple targets, each time with different access rights. As
well, a target can have multiple identities, each with different access rights.
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wwui1
wwui2
wwui3
wwui4
wwui5
wwui6
wwui7
wwui8
wwui9
wwui10
Vol 1
Vol 2
iSCSI Target 1
wwui21
Ident A
Ident B
Ident C
Vol 3
iSCSI Target 2
wwui22
Vol 4
iSCSI Target 3
wwui23
Vol 5
Vol 6
iSCSI Target 4
wwui24
Figure 58.
Access Rights per Identity-Target Pair
In Figure 58, Identity A is coupled with both Target 1 and Target 2. The
Identity A – Target 1 pair is assigned iSCSI initiator read-write access to
Target 1 volumes. The Identity A – Target 2 pair, however, is assigned
iSCSI initiator read-only access to Target 2 volumes.
When you assign an identity to a target, you give the identity a position,
beginning with 1 and increasing in number with increasing specificity of the
identity. A position is an identity’s rank in the V-Switch scan for an iSCSI
initiator – identity match. When the V-Switch scans the list of identities
coupled with a target, it starts with the highest position and stops with the
first iSCSI initiator – identity match. The V-Switch takes the first fit; not the
best fit.
wwui1
wwui2
Ident A
wwui3
Vol 2
Vol 3
wwui4
wwui5
wwui6
wwui7
wwui8
wwui9
wwui10
iSCSI Target 2
wwui22
Ident B
Figure 59.
iSCSI Initiator in Two Different Identities
In Figure 59, iSCSI initiator WWUI8 is part of Identity A and Identity B. If
Identity A and Identity B are coupled with Target 2, iSCSI initiator WWUI8
will have two different access options to Volumes 2 and 3: read-write and
112
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
read-only, depending on the positioning of the identities. If Identity A is
assigned position 1 and Identity B is assigned position 2, Identity B is
scanned first by the V-Switch. A match is made and the scan is stopped.
No further identities will be scanned. Therefore, iSCSI initiator WWUI8
will be granted read-write access.
If the positions are reversed and Identity B is assigned position 1 and
Identity A is assigned position 2, iSCSI initiator WWUI8 will be granted
read-only access.
Authentication
The V-Switch supports the authentication methods CHAP and SRP for the
iSCSI initiator. The credentials for CHAP and SRP are the combination of
user name + password. An authentication method is assigned per identity
and not per iSCSI initiator. An identity can be assigned one or both
authentication methods. If no authentication method is assigned, all listed
iSCSI initiators in an identity will have un-authenticated login rights.
When an iSCSI initiator logs in to a target, its WWUI is checked against the
identity initiator list. After the iSCSI initiator passes the identity stage, if
credentials are configured, the iSCSI initiator must authenticate itself. The
credentials list is checked for the iSCSI initiator’s user name + password.
The list can contain a separate user name + password for each initiator; a
few user name + password pairs common to a few initiators or a single user
name + password for all initiators in the identity.
Ident B
Initiators
Credentials
wwui3
wwui4
wwui6
wwui7
wwui8
wwui9
CHAP
SRP
Sarah C6H12O6
Dinos RockOn
Dinos RockOn
Albert energy
Figure 60.
Identity with iSCSI Initiators and Credentials
In Figure 60, there are six iSCSI initiators in Identity B but only four user
name + password credentials. Certain initiators have the same user name +
password configured on them.
Default Identity
When you create a target, it is automatically coupled to a default identity.
The default identity gives un-authenticated read-write access to all iSCSI
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
initiators. The default identity is assigned position 0, meaning it is the last
scanned. Unlike user-created identities, the default identity cannot be
uncoupled from a target. Its access can only be modified.
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
wwui1
wwui2
Vol 1
RW
Vol 2
RW
Vol 3
RW
IP SAN
V-Switch
Identity A
Def Ident
Identity B
Def Ident
Target 1
Target 2
Ident A
Ident B
wwui1
wwui2
RW
RW
Default
all
Default
all
NA
NA
iSCSI Target 1
wwui3
iSCSI Target 2
wwui4
Vol 1
LU0
Vol 2
LU0
Vol 3
LU1
Figure 61.
Modifying Default Identities
In Figure 61, the default identities for Target 1 and Target 2 have been
modified to not accessible (NA) for all initiators. Remember that the default
identity is in position 0 so it is the last position scanned by the V-Switch.
Target 1 is coupled with Identity A with read-write (RW) access to Identity
A iSCSI initiators, meaning WWUI1.
Target 2 is coupled with Identity B with read-write (RW) access to Identity
B iSCSI initiators, meaning WWUI2.
When iSCSI initiator WWUI1 logs in to Target 1, the V-Switch first scans
Identity A and finds the initiator listed there. The scan stops and the
initiator is granted read-write access to Target 1’s underlying volume,
Volume 1.
114
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If iSCSI initiator WWUI1 tries to login to Target 2, the V-Switch first scans
Identity B. It does not find the initiator listed so it continues to scan the next
identity, the default identity. The default identity blocks all iSCSI initiators,
including WWUI1. The scan stops and the initiator is denied access to
Target 2’s underlying volumes, Volume 2 and Volume 3, since the default
identity is configured as not assessable.
When planning and creating identities, keep in mind that:
ꢀ
ꢀ
Each identity can contain one or more iSCSI initiators.
Each identity can be assigned one or both login authentication
methods.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Each identity can be attached to more than one target.
Each target is first automatically coupled to a default read-write
un-authenticated access identity.
ꢀ
Each target can have more than one identity.
Creating an iSCSI Target
You can create all of your iSCSI targets using the CLI command iscsi
target create. These targets will have no initial associated LUNs and
will not be exposed to hosts when first created. It will have the default
identity automatically attached to it. Later, when you want to expose
volumes on the target, you can attach LUNs to the targets using the CLI
command volume expose.
All CLI names and
aliases are case
sensitive
If you are working in a V-Switch cluster, each target and LUN must be
configured on both V-Switches in the V-Switch cluster. For more
information on V-Switch clusters, see “Introduction to V-Switch Clusters,”
page 72.
iscsi target create
You need to define three parameters to create an iSCSI target:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
finance
TARGET ALIAS
USER-ASSIGNED
ALIAS FOR ISCSI
TARGET
MANDATORY
–tn
sanrad.
billing
TARGET WWUI
DEVICE
USER-ASSIGNED
WORLD-WIDE
UNIQUE IDENTIFIER
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
FOR THE TARGET
–device
VSwitch1
ALIAS OF V-
SWITCH TO EXPOSE
TAREGT ON
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
The target finance is created on V-Switch 1. The WWUI of Finance is
billing.sanrad, as shown in Figure 62.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
each target must be
configured on both V-
Switches.
iscsi target create –ta finance –tn sanrad.billing –
device VSwitch1
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
IP SAN
V-Switch1
Default
all
RW
finance
sanrad.billing
Figure 62.
Creating a Target
Viewing iSCSI Targets
Use the CLI command iscsi target showto view all created iSCSI
targets.
iscsi target show
116
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 22:
iSCSI Targets
Target Alias Target Name
# of LUs Exposed On:
Not exposed
finance
sanrad.billing 0
musicbox.sanrad 1
musicbox
VSwitch1
Viewing iSCSI Target Details
Use the CLI command iscsi target details to view the details of an
iSCSI target.
iscsi target details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
Finance
TARGET ALIAS
USER-ASSIGNED
ALIAS FOR ISCSI
TARGET
MANDATORY
Table 23:
Target Alias:
Target Name:
CHAP User Name:
Status:
nms153
eui.00081affff012345
sanrad
OK
1
Number of Ports:
Port Name:
eui.00081affff012345
,t,0
Number of LUs:
2
# Login Failures:
Last Failure Time:
Last Failure Type:
5
10/12/04 15:30
Authentication Error
Plony
Last Initiator Name:
Last Initiator IP:
1.2.3.4
Viewing Access Rights
After creating a target, use the CLI command acl showto view the target’s
automatically connected default identity.
acl show
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 24:
Target
Default Identity Target Access
Position
Identity
DEF_ALL
Access
finance
musicbox
musicbox
0
0
1
read-write
not accessible
read-write
DEF_ALL
musicdept
118
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Default Identity
When a target is created, a default access control identity is automatically
assigned to its position 0. The default identity allows all hosts read-write
access to the target and its underlying volume(s).
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the default access
rights must be
disabled on both V-
Switches.
If you want to specify other access rights, you must change the general
read-write access. Use the CLI command acl set to modify a target’s
access rights and identity position.
If you add or modify identities on a target after its volumes have been
exposed, the access rights will take effect only at the next login for each
iSCSI initiator. Therefore, it is recommended to modify the default access
rights for a target first before creating new identities to insure that it will
not inadvertently be exposed to all iSCSI initiators in the beginning.
In the event of a
failover, if the default
access rights are not
modified on both V-
Switches, all volumes
attached to the target
will be read-write
acl set
accessible to all
iSCSI initiators.
You need to define four parameters to modify an identity:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
finance
TARGET
ALIAS OF TARGET
TO CONNECT WITH
ACL IDNETITY
MANDATORY
-id
DEF_ALL
na
IDENTITY
ACCESS
ACL IDENTITY
MANDATORY
OPTIONAL
-acc
ACCESS RIGHTS TO
TARGET:
DEFAULT=RW
RW =READ-WRITE
RO = READ-ONLY
NA =NOT
ACCESSIBLE
-pos
0
POSITION
IDENTITY RANK IN
ACCESS RIGHT
OPTIONAL
EVALUATION SCAN
DEFAULT=NEXT
HIGHEST AVAILABLE
NUMBER
Example
The default access rights for the target finance are changed to not accessible
meaning a non-specific host is not allowed access to the target finance.
acl set –ta finance –id def_all –acc na
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an Identity
If you want to limit host, meaning iSCSI initiator, access to targets, you
must create an identity that is more discriminate than the default identity.
Use the CLI command acl identity createto name and describe an
identity.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
each identity must be
configured on both V-
Switches.
When creating identities, keep in mind that:
ꢀ
ꢀ
Each identity can contain one or more iSCSI initiators.
If you are working
with an iSNS server,
all hosts are able to
see the target but
only those hosts with
access rights are
able to connect to the
target.
Each identity can be assigned one or both login authentication
methods.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Each identity can be attached to more than one target.
Each target is first automatically coupled to a default read-write
un-authenticated access identity.
ꢀ
Each target can have more than one identity.
acl identity create
You need to define two parameters to create an identity:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-alias
accounting
ALIAS
ALIAS FOR
IDENTITY
MANDATORY
-info
accountants
allowed read-
write access
to accounting
records
INFORMATION
INFORMATION ON
IDENTITY
OPTIONAL
Example
An identity, accounting, is created for those accountants allowed read-write
access to the accounting records, as shown in Figure 63, page 121.
acl identity create – alias accounting – info
accountants allowed read-write access to accounting
records
120
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
IP SAN
V-Switch1
accounting
Default
all
NA
finance
sanrad.billing
Figure 63.
Creating an Identity
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Initiators to an Identity
After creating an identity, you can begin adding hosts by their iSCSI
initiator WWUIs to the identity. The identity is a group of iSCSI initiators.
It is not enough for an authorized host to request access to a target. The
host must be requesting access from the correct iSCSI initiator. Use the
CLI command acl identity add nameto add iSCSI initiators to an
identity. Repeat this command to add all of the desired host initiators to
the identity.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
each initiator must be
added on both V-
Switches.
acl identity add name
You need to define two parameters to add an initiator an identity:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
accounting
IDENTITY
ALIAS OF IDENTITY
MANDATORY
-name
iqn.1991-05.
microsoft:
INITIATOR NAME
WWUI OF
MANDATORY
INITIATOR
steven.sanrad
122
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example
The host, steven, is added to the identity accounting according to his iSCSI
initiator wwui, iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad.
acl identity add name –id accounting –name iqn. 1991-05.
microsoft: steven.sanrad
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
IP SAN
V-Switch1
accounting
microsoft:steven
Default
all
NA
finance
sanrad.billing
Figure 64.
Adding an Initiator
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a host has more than one iSCSI initiator installed, both initiators can be
included in the identity.
acl identity add name –id accounting –name iqn.com.
cisco.steven
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
IP SAN
V-Switch1
cisco.steven
accounting
microsoft:steven
Default
all
NA
finance
sanrad.billing
Figure 65.
Adding a Second Initiator
124
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning Identity Credentials
You can require initiator authentication before allowing access to a target
and its underlying volume(s). The V-Switch supports CHAP and SRP
authentication methods. Microsoft and Cisco initiators support CHAP.
Use the CLI command acl identity add chap/srpto assign a login
authentication method(s) to initiators in an identity.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the identity
authentication
method(s) must be
added on both V-
Switches.
An assigned authentication method encrypts the host login name and
password. The authentication method does not encrypt the virtual
volume data transferred. The host login and password do not have to
relate to the iSCSI initiator WWUI. They can be any selected character
strings.
If you are working with a Microsoft initiator and configuring target
authentication, note that the V-Switch exchanges the final character in the
password with a zero. Therefore, do not configure initiator passwords
with a zero as the final character. CHAP passwords must be between
twelve to sixteen characters in length.
In the event of a
failover, if each
identity does not
require
authentication on
both V-Switches,
each attached
acl identity add chap
identity will have free
access to the target’s
underlying volumes.
You need to define four parameters to assign the CHAP/SRP
authentication method to an identity:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
accounting
IDENTITY
ALIAS OF IDENTITY
MANDATORY
-us
-pw
steven
USER NAME
INITIATOR USER
NAME
MANDATORY
oneveryhot
dude
USER PASSWORD
INITIATOR
PASSWORD
MANDATORY
UNLESS A
RADIUS
SERVER IS USED
12-16 CHAR
STRING
-radius
No parameter
required
RADIUS
RADIUS SERVER
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: NO
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example
The user name, steven, with user password, oneveryhotdude, is assigned
CHAP credential verification in the identity accounting.
acl identity add chap –id accounting –us steven –pw
oneveryhotdude
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
IP SAN
V-Switch1
steven
oneveryhotdude
cisco.steven
accounting
microsoft:steven
Default
all
NA
finance
sanrad.billing
Figure 66.
Assigning Credentials
126
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a host has more than one iSCSI initiator installed, both initiators can be
included in the identity and given authentication methods. The user name
and password do not need to be the same for different initiators on the
same host.
acl identity add chap –id accounting –us steven –pw
ilovecookies
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
IP SAN
V-Switch1
steven
oneveryhotdude
cisco.steven
accounting
steven
microsoft:steven
ilovecookies
Default
all
NA
finance
sanrad.billing
Figure 67.
Adding Another Set of Credentials
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After assigning iSCSI initiators and assigning credentials to an identity, use
the CLI command acl identity detailsto view the list of iSCSI
initiators.
acl identity details
You need to define one parameter to view an identity’s details:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
accounting
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
acl identity details –id accounting
Table 25: Identity Details
Description:
Accounts allowed read-write
access to accounting records
Initiators:
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.
sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
CHAP
Credentials:
Using a RADIUS Server
When CHAP user names and passwords are configured on the network in
a remote RADIUS server, use the CLI command acl identity add
chapto direct a CHAP challenge to the RADIUS server and eliminate the
need to configure all user name + password pairs on the V-Switch. This
decreases configuration time and increase overall network security. Use
the CLI command ip radius addto add a RADIUS server address to
the V-Switch RADIUS client.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the RADIUS server
must be configured
on both V Switches.
In Figure 68, page 129, a CHAP authentication challenge is sent to the V-
Switch. The V-Switch first checks if the user name is set for RADIUS
authentication. If it is, the CHAP challenge is passed on to the RADIUS
server. If it is not, the user name and password are compared against the
pairs configured in the V-Switch.
128
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
CHAP Authentication
steven
oneveryhotdude
IP SAN
RADIUS Server
Yes
V-Switch1
RADIUS
Authentication?
No
cisco.steven
accounting
steven
ilovecookies
microsoft:steven
Default
all
NA
finance
sanrad.billing
Figure 68.
Sending a CHAP Authentication Challenge
ip radius add
You need to define three parameters to add a RADIUS server IP to the
RADIUS client
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.2
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
RADIUS SERVER
MANDATORY
-p
-k
1812
PORT
KEY
UDP PORT
OPTIONAL
DataTurnsMeOn
SHARED SECRET
BETWEEN RADIUS
SERVER AND V-
SWITCH
MANDATORY
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
In Figure 69, the V-Switch is configured to relay CHAP challenges to the
identity, accounting, from the user, steven, to the RADIUS server. The V-
Switch is configured to communicate with the RADIUS server through port
1812 to IP address 212.199.43.2. The V-Switch – RADIUS key is
DataTurnsMeOn.
The user password is not configured on the V-Switch. The RADIUS server
authenticates the user password and sends the results back to the V-Switch.
acl identity add_chap –id accounting –user steven –
radius yes
ip radius add –ip 212.199.43.2 –p 1812 –k DataTurnsMeOn
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
CHAP Authentication:
steven
oneveryhotdude
steven
oneveryhotdude
IP SAN
RADIUS Server
User: steven
PW: oneveryhotdude
Key: DataTurnsMeOn
V-Switch1
RADIUS
Authentication?
cisco.steven
allow
accounting
steven
microsoft:steven
ilovecookies
Default
all
NA
finance
sanrad.billing
Figure 69.
Logging in to a RADIUS Server
130
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Configured RADIUS Servers
Use the CLI command ip radius show to view all configured RADIUS
server IP addresses.
ip radius show
Table 26:
Configured RADIUS IP Addresses
Address
Port
212.199.43.2
1812
1812
212.199.56.134
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting an Identity and Target
Once created, an identity must be connected to a target to provide it with
access control. An identity specifies which access rights the iSCSI
initiators within the Identity have to the target.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
each Identity must be
connected to the
target(s) on both V-
Switches.
When an identity is connected to a target, it is also given a position. The
position of the identity determines its place in the V-Switch access rights
evaluation. An identity with the position 0 (default identity) is the last
identity evaluated when an initiator tries to access a volume. If the
initiator meets the profile of the identity, it is granted that identity ‘s access
rights. If not, the V-Switch continues to position 1. The V-Switch does not
scan all identities to determine which most specifically fits the host.
Therefore, identities must be positioned in decreasing specificity to
function correctly. The V-Switch scans for the first fit and not the best fit.
All CLI names and
aliases are case
sensitive
An identity can be connected to more than one target to provide the same
conditions for each target. Use the CLI command acl addto connect an
identity to a target.
acl add
You need to define four parameters to connect an identity to a target:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
finance
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF TARGET
TO ATTACH TO
MANDATORY
-id
accounting
rw
IDENTITY
ACCESS
NAME OF ACL
IDENTITY
MANDATORY
-acc
ACCESS RIGHTS TO
TARGET:
DEFAULT=RW
RW =READ-WRITE
RO = READ-ONLY
NA =NOT
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT=RW
ACCESSIBLE
-pos
1
POSITION
ACL RANK IN
ACCESS RIGHT
OPTIONAL
ASSIGNED LAST
POSITION IF
EVALUATION SCAN
NOT SPECIFIED
Example
The identity, accounting, is connected to the target finance. Accounting is
the second identity scanned for an initiator match. Any initiator in the
accounting identity is given read-only access. Later, an administrator
identity can be created with read-write access and placed in position 0.
132
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
acl add –ta finance –id accounting –acc rw –pos 1
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.Steven
iqn.1991-05.microsoft:wilbur.sanrad
IP SAN
V-Switch1
steven
oneveryhotdude
cisco.steven
Accounting
RW
steven
ilovecookies
microsoft:steven
Default
all
NA
Finance
billing.sanrad
Figure 70.
Connecting a Target and Identity
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposing an iSCSI Target and LUN
To make a volume accessible to a host, you need to assign a LUN to it,
attach the LUN to an iSCSI target and expose the target. The CLI
command volume exposeis used in two ways:
The first LUN
assigned to an iSCSI
target must be
LU 0.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Create and expose a new target.
Expose an existing target.
A LUN value cannot
be larger than 255.
The CLI command volume expose -newcreates a new iSCSI target,
assigns a volume LUN and then exposes the new target.
All CLI names and
aliases are case
sensitive.
After creating a target and LU0, you can add additional LUNs to the target
using the CLI command volume expose (without the –newswitch).
volume expose
A snapshot volume
must be exposed on
the same V-Switch
as the source
If you are working in a V-Switch cluster, each target and LUN must be
configured on both V-Switches in the V-Switch cluster. For more
information on V-Switch clusters, see “Introduction to V-Switch Clusters,”
page 72.
volume.
If you add or modify identities on a target after its volumes have been
exposed, the access rights will take effect only at the next login for each
iSCSI initiator.
You need to define six parameters to create and expose an iSCSI target and
volume LUN:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-new
No parameter
required
NEW TARGET
NEW ISCSI
TARGET TO CREATE
OPTIONAL
-vol
-ta
Vol1
finance
0
VOLUME ALIAS
TARGET ALIAS
LU NUMBER
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO CREATE LU0
AND TARGET FOR
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
USER-ASSIGNED
ALIAS OF TARGET
TO CREATE
-lun
-tn
USER-ASSIGNED
LUN FOR
EXPOSING VOLUME
MANDATORY
ON EXISTING
TARGET
sanrad.
billing
TARGET WWUI
USER-ASSIGNED
WORLD WIDE
MANDATORY ON
A NEW TARGET
UNIQUE IDENTIFIER
FOR THE TARGET
134
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-device
VSwitch1
DEVICE
ALIAS OF V-
SWITCH TO EXPOSE
TARGET ON
MANDATORY ON
A NEW TARGET
Example 1:
The target finance already exists. The WWUI of finance has already been
assigned to the target. The volume Vol1 is assigned LU0 and attached to
the target finance. The exposing device is VSwitch1.
volume expose –vol Vol1 –ta finance –lun 0
iSCSI
iSCSI
initiator
initiator
iqn.1991o-0e5.moicrosoft:steven.sanrad
iqn.com.cisco.steven
iqn.1991-05.micoroesooft:wilbur.sanrad
IP SAN
V-Switch1
steven
oneveryhotdude
cisco.steven
accounting
RW
steven
ilovecookies
microsoft:steven
Default
all
NA
finance
sanrad.billing
Vol 1
LU0
Figure 71.
Exposing a Volume
Chapter 7: Volume Exposure and Security
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2:
The target musicbox is created. The WWUI of musicbox is
sanrad.musicbox. The volume Concat1 is automatically assigned LU0 and
attached to the target musicbox on VSwitch1.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
this target and LUN
must be configured
on both V-Switches.
volume expose -new –vol Concat1 –ta musicbox -tn
sanrad.musicbox –device VSwitch1
Viewing LUNs
You can view all created LUNs using the CLI command lu show.
lu show
Table 27:
Details of all LUNs
LUN
0
Tgt Alias Volume
Oper Status
Active
pilote
spirou
pilote
lucky
Stripe1
0
Concat2
Active
1
Mir1
Active
0
Mirror/Concat
Active
136
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Advanced Volume Operations
Once you have configured your initial basic volume topology, you
can do more advanced volume operations.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
This chapter explains how to:
INTRODUCTION TO
ADVANCED VOLUME
CONFIGURATIONS
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Create an off-line volume copy.
Create an on-line volume copy.
Break a mirror to remove a child.
Create a snapshot.
COPYING A VOLUME
(OFF-LINE COPY)
SYNCHRONIZING A
VOLUME
ADDING A CHILD TO A
MIRROR (ON-LINE
COPY)
Increase a volume’s capacity.
CREATING A
SNAPSHOT
BREAKING A MIRROR
RESIZING A VOLUME
EXPANDING A VOLUME
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to Advanced Volume
Configurations
The V-Switch supports several advanced volume operations. Some do the
same or similar functions. Each has its own advantages so it is important to
understand their differences to best choose the function most appropriate
for you SAN.
Data Replication: Off-line versus On-line
Off-line data replication creates a copy of a volume. The source volume can
be any type of volume. If the source volume is exposed, it must be taken
offline, creating an interruption of service to the host. The destination
volume must also be off-line. On-line data replication is done via a
mirrored volume. The source and destination volumes must be children the
same mirror. On-line data replication presents no interruption of service.
Because on-line replication must take into account the possibility of
read/write operations to the source volume during the data replication, it is
slower than off-line data replication.
Mirror versus Snapshot
A mirrored volume copy is a full, complete volume copy. A snapshot is
only a record of changes to a volume. Because of this, its capacity can be
smaller than a mirrored volume copy by as much as eighty percent. Both a
mirrored volume copy and a snapshot can be exposed to a host like any
other volume. However, unlike a mirrored copy, a snapshot is
nonfunctional if its source volume goes off-line or its capacity is exceeded in
write operations. A snapshot volume must also be exposed on the same V-
Switch as its source volume while a mirrored copy has no dependency on
its source.
Actual Capacity versus Potential Capacity
Potential capacity is the maximum capacity a volume could be. Actual
capacity is the capacity that the server recognizes a virtual volume as
having.
Resizing versus Expanding
Resizing increases a virtual volume’s potential capacity. Expanding
increases a virtual volume’s actual capacity. A volume must first be
resized. Only after a volume is resized can it be expanded.
138
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying a Volume (Off-line Copy)
Data from any volume type can be replicated offline using the CLI
command volume copy create. Off-line replication is faster than on-
line replication but both the source and destination volumes must be off-
line which can create an interruption of service to the volume host(s).
Because snapshot volumes are internal (off-line) volumes, this is a way of
copying a snapshot volume.
volume copy create
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
ScienceLab
SOURCE
ALIAS OF SOURCE
VOLUME TO COPY
MANDATORY
-dst
ScienceLabII
DESTINATION
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO COPY TO
MANDATORY
volume copy create –src ScienceLab –dst ScienceLabII
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronizing a Volume
If one child of a mirrored volume, the source, already contains data, the
data can be replicated to the second child, the destination, using the CLI
command volume mirror sync. This can be done on-line while the
source volume is still exposed or off-line while both the source and
destination volumes are unexposed. See how to expose volumes “Volume
Exposure & Security,” page 107. On-line data replication is slower but
allows the source volume to remain on-line with no interruption of service
to the volume host(s). Off-line replication is faster than on-line replication
but both the source and destination volumes must be taken off-line which
can create an interruption of service to the volume host(s).
See the working example of off-line data replication “Replicating Data Off-
line,” page 264.
volume mirror sync
You need to define two parameters to synchronize a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
Simple3
SOURCE
VOLUME
ORIGINAL VOLUME
TO SYNCHRONIZE
TO
MANDATORY
-dst
Simple5
DESTINATION
VOLUME
NEW VOLUME TO
ADD TO
MANDATORY
SYNCHRONINZE
Example:
The on-line volume Simple3 is synchronized to the on-line volume Simple5.
volume mirror sync –src Simple3 –dst Simple5
140
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Child to a Mirror (On-line Copy)
To perform on-line data replication, either by increasing the number of
children in a mirrored volume or creating a mirrored copy of any other
type of volume, except transparent and snapshot volumes, you can use the
CLI command volume mirror add.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the child must be
added on both V-
Switches.
Since this is on-line data replication, the source volume does not need to
be taken off-line and write operations to the source volume can continue
while the mirror is being created. Any data written to the volume will be
included in the added child(ren). Use this command to replace a failed
disk in a mirrored volume without taking the mirror off-line.
The added child can be any type of volume, except transparent or snapshot,
and it must be the same size or greater than the actual capacity of the mirror
volume.
In Figure 72, a mirrored volume with two children has another child added.
The mirrored volume stays at the head of the hierarchy.
Mir
1T
Ch1
1T
Ch2
1T
Vol X
1T
Mir
1T
Ch1
1T
Ch2
1T
Ch3
1T
Figure 72.
Adding Another Child to a Mirror
In Figure 73, page 142 , a concatenated volume becomes one child of a new
mirrored volume. This adds a level to the hierarchy. The new mirrored
volume becomes the head of the volume hierarchy. The new mirrored
volume automatically assumes the LUN from the concatenated volume.
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information on attaching volumes to LUNs, “Exposing an iSCSI
Target and LUN,” page 134.
Creating a mirror from a single volume creates data redundancy. Adding
an extra child to a mirror does not create data redundancy. It increases the
existing redundancy.
Con
LU0
Vol X
Mir
LU0
Con
LU0
Ch 2
Figure 73.
Creating a Mirror to Add Data Redundancy
volume mirror add
You need to define four parameters to add a mirrored volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mirror5
VOLUME
SOURCE VOLUME
MANDATORY
TO ADD MIRROR TO
-ch
Simple10
CHILD
NEW CHILD TO ADD
TO MIRROR
MANDATORY
-no
sync
No parameter
required
NO
DISABLE
OPTIONAL
NO SYNC IF
USED
SYNCHRONIZATION
AUTOMATIC
MIRROR SYNC
142
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
In Figure 74, the simple volume, Sim6, is added as the third child to
mirrored volume Mir4.
volume mirror add –vol Mir4 –ch Sim6
Mir4
1T
Sim2
1T
Sim4
1T
Sim6
1T
Mir4
1T
Sim2
1T
Sim4
1T
Sim6
1T
Figure 74.
Adding Sim6 to Mir4
Use the CLI command volume mirror showto view the status of all
mirror synchronizations.
volume mirror show
Source Destination Oper
Status
Admin
Status
Progress
Sim4
Sim6
Operating Synchroniz 60%
e
Ch1
Ch3
Ended OK
Dummy
Abort
100%
-
Simle10 Simple12
Ended
error
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Snapshot
You can create a snapshot, a point-in-time copy, of any volume at the top of a
hierarchy using the CLI command volume create snapshot. A
snapshot does not create a full copy of its source volume. It is a dynamic
and dependent volume that stores the original data from a source volume
when changes to the source volume are made after the snapshot’s creation.
Snapshot volumes use the copy old on write method, copying the old source
data to the snapshot and only then writing new data to the source volume.
Snapshots can be used for serverless backup, reducing the load on the
application server. The backup copy from a snapshot is a full copy of the
source volume at the time of the snapshot and adequate size must be
allocated for the backup volume. A snapshot can be built on any volume
hierarchy but, once created, cannot be used as a child in another volume
hierarchy. This means that a snapshot can be created on a mirror volume
with two children. However, after the snapshot is created, a mirror volume
cannot be created, using the snapshot as one of the children, to copy the
snapshot volume.
Figure 75, shows a source volume with its snapshot when the snapshot is
first created. Initially, a snapshot is empty because there has not yet been a
change in its source volume. Only when a write operation is performed on
the source volume will the snapshot begin to fill up.
QA Testing
Snapshot1
S
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
Figure 75.
1st Snapshot Created
Figure 76, page 145 shows the same source and snapshot volume after a
write operation to sector 1. The snapshot records the original data from
sector 1, S, to the snapshot and then the new data, B, is written to the source
volume.
144
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
QA Testing
Snapshot1
S
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
QA Testing
Snapshot1
B
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
S
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
Figure 76.
1st Write to Source and Update to 1st Snapshot
The more active the write operations are to a source volume, the more
capacity its snapshots need to have. SANRAD requires a beginning
snapshot volume of at least one percent of the size of its source volume. A
snapshot volume can be resized to accommodate a growing capacity need.
A snapshot volume has a user-defined load threshold to monitor when a
snapshot approaches full capacity. When the load threshold is exceeded, an
alert is sent to resize the volume. See “Resizing a Volume,” page 153.
A snapshot volume contains a table of pointers detailing which volume to
read from, the source or the snapshot, for each sector. For this reason, the
full capacity of a snapshot volume is not available for source copying. The
table size is:
(Size of Source Volume in blocks)/[(256)(Size of a Block in Snapshot/4)]
Deleting a snapshot volume has no effect on other snapshot volumes of the
same source.
A snapshot can have read-write or read-only access and, when exposed, it
must be exposed on the same V-Switch as its source volume.
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume create snapshot
You need four parameters to create a snapshot volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
VOLUME
SNAPSHOT NAME
MANDATORY
-src
-ch
SOURCE
SOURCE OF
SNAPSHOT
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
CHILD
SNAPSHOT CHILD
-lt
LOAD THRESHOLD
PERCENTAGE FULL
AT DESTINATION
TO TRIGGER AN
ALARM
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 80%
Example:
Figure 77 shows a source volume with its first snapshot when the snapshot
is first created. Initially, a snapshot is empty because there has not yet been
a change in its source volume. Only when a write operation is performed
on the source volume will the snapshot begin to fill up. The pointer table
for the snapshot would point to the source volume for all sectors.
volume create snapshot –vol Snapshot1 –src QATesting –
dst Snapshot1 -lt 80
QA Testing
Snapshot1
S
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
A
N
A
S
M
U
M
N
Figure 77.
1st Snapshot
Figure 78, page 147 shows the same source and snapshot volume after a
write operation to sector 1. The original data, S, from sector 1 is first copied
to the snapshot and then the new data, B, is written to the source volume.
146
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QA Testing
Snapshot1
S
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
QA Testing
Snapshot1
B
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
S
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
Figure 78.
Update to 1st Snapshot & 1st Write to Source
Figure 79, page 148 shows the creation of a second snapshot and a second
write operation to the source volume. The original data, N, A and P, from
sectors 5, 9 and 13 are first copied to the Snapshot 1 & 2 and then the new
data, B, E and B, are written to the source volume.
Because snapshot volumes are independent of each other, the original data
must be written to each relevant snapshot, as in Snapshot 1 and 2. The
pointer table is only between a single snapshot and its source; never to parts
of other snapshots. Therefore, if one snapshot volume fails, no other
snapshot is affected.
volume create snapshot –vol Snapshot2 –src QATesting –ch
Snapshot2 -lt 80
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QA Testing
Snapshot1
S
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
QA Testing
Snapshot1
B
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
S
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
QA Testing
Snapshot1
Snapshot2
B
B
E
B
S
H
O
T
S
N
A
P
A
A
N
S
N
A
P
M
U
M
N
Figure 79.
2nd Snapshot Created, Update to 1st Snapshot & 2nd
Snapshot and Write to Source
Figure 80, page 149, shows the creation of a third snapshot and a third write
operation to the source volume. The original data, S, H, O and T, from
sectors 4, 8, 12 and 16 are first copied to the Snapshot 1, 2 and 3 and then the
new data, D, S, A and S, are written to the source volume.
volume create snapshot –vol Snapshot3 –src QATesting –ch
Snapshot3 -lt 80
148
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QA Testing
Snapshot1
S
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
QA Testing
Snapshot1
B
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
S
A
A
N
S
M
U
M
N
QA Testing
Snapshot1
Snapshot2
B
B
E
B
S
H
O
T
S
N
A
P
A
A
N
S
N
A
P
M
U
M
N
QA Testing
Snapshot1
QA Testing
QA Testing
B
B
E
B
D
S
A
S
S
N
A
P
S
H
O
T
S
H
O
T
S
H
O
T
A
A
N
S
N
A
P
M
U
M
N
Figure 80.
3rd Snapshot Created, Update to 1st & 2nd Snapshot and
Write to Source
Viewing Snapshot Volumes
You can view all created snapshot volumes using the CLI command
volume snapshot show. Use this command to view the source and
snapshot volumes, the time the snapshot was created and the percent
capacity utilization. At user-defined load threshold utilization, an alert to
resize the snapshot is sent.
volume snapshot show
Table 27:
All Snapshot Volumes
Source
Snapshot
Snp1Mir3
Date & Time
Utilization
80%
Mirror3
12/12/02
13:00:00
Mirror3
Snp2Mir3
12/12/02
14:00:00
60%
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can view all snapshots of a single source volume using the CLI
command volume snapshot list.
volume snapshot list
You need one parameter to view a volume’s snapshots:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mirror7
VOLUME
SNAPSHOT SOURCE
VOLUME
MANDATORY
Example:
Table 28 lists the only snapshot for Mirror7.
volume snapshot list –vol Mirror7
Table 28:
All Snapshots of a Specific Volume
Snapshot
Snp1Mir1
Date & Time
Utilization
20%
12/12/02 20:00:00
Breaking a Mirror
You can remove one of multiple children from a mirror or break a two-
child mirrored volume to enable one or both of the children to be used
independently. The removed child is a fully functional volume and can be
exposed to any host. In particular, the removed child can be used for
testing, online server-free backup or online data migration.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the child must be
removed on both V-
Switches.
If you break a mirrored volume that is attached to a LUN, the remaining
volume retains the attached LUN. Write operations to the source volume
can continue while the mirror is being broken or a child removed but the
removed child’s data cannot be guaranteed to mirror the source volume.
Therefore, all write operations should be suspended appropriately before
breaking a mirror.
A mirror cannot be broken or a child removed if one of the volumes needs
to be synchronized or it is in the process of synchronizing or copying.
In Figure 81, page 151, a child is removed from a mirrored volume with
three children. If the mirrored volume is exposed, it remains functional as a
mirrored volume and all read-write operations are executed.
150
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mir
1T
Ch1
1T
Ch2
1T
Ch3
1T
Mir
1T
Able to be exposed
as an independent
volume
Ch1
1T
Ch2
1T
Vol X
1T
Figure 81.
Removing a Child from a Mirror
In Figure 82, a child is removed from a mirrored volume with two children.
This breaks the mirror. If the mirrored volume is exposed or attached to a
LUN, the source volume retains the LUN. There is no need to reassign a
LUN to the remaining source volume. All read-write operations will be
executed without a break in service.
Mir
LU0
Con
Ch 2
Able to be exposed
as an independent
volume
Con
LU0
Vol X
Figure 82.
Breaking a Mirror
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume mirror break
You need to define two parameters to break a mirror:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mirror5
VOLUME
VOLUME MIRROR IS
ADDING TO
MANDATORY
-ch
Simple10
CHILD
CHILD TO BREAK
FROM MIRROR
MANDATORY
Example:
In Figure 83, the simple volume Sim5 is removed from mirrored volume
Mir1.
volume mirror break –vol Mir1 –ch Sim5
Mir1
1T
Sim1
1T
Sim3
1T
Sim5
1T
Mir1
1T
Able to be exposed
as an independent
volume
Sim1
1T
Sim3
1T
Sim5
1T
Figure 83.
Removing Sim5 from Mir1
152
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resizing a Volume
You can increase a virtual volume’s potential capacity using the CLI
command volume resize. This is the first step in increasing a virtual
volume’s actual capacity. Potential capacity is the maximum capacity a
volume could be. Actual capacity is the capacity that the server recognizes
a virtual volume as having.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster, a
volume must be
resized on both V
Switches.
Resizing a volume is done while the top-level volume in the hierarchy is
exposed on an iSCSI target. Simple, snapshot, concatenated and previously
resized volumes can be resized. Resizing a volume concatenates a new
volume with the source volume. Only a simple volume can be used to
resize a simple or snapshot volume.
After one or more volumes in a hierarchy are resized, the volume must be
expanded to make its actual capacity equal to its new potential capacity.
See “Expanding a Volume,” page 158.
In Figure 84, is a mirrored volume with a potential capacity of one terabyte.
The smallest child of the mirrored volume determines the mirrored
volume’s potential capacity. Resizing the one-terabyte child to two
terabytes will increase the mirrored volume’s potential capacity to two
terabytes. The actual capacity of the mirrored volume remains unchanged
until it is expanded to match its potential size.
Mir
1T
Ch 1
2T
Ch 2
1T
Sim3
1T
Figure 84.
Asymetrical Mirrored Volume
When a simple or snapshot volume is resized with another simple volume,
the first step in their resize concatenation is the creation of a cube. A cube is
a special type of volume intermediary created for resizing a volume
through concatenation. In Figure 85, page 154, the original connection to
the child to resize is broken and transferred to the cube. A cube’s default
alias is X+resized volume’s alias. In Figure 85, page 154, the alias of the
volume to resize is Ch2; the alias of the cube isXCh2.
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mir
1T
Ch 1
2T
Ch 2
1T
XCh 2
Sim3
1T
Figure 85.
Creating a Cube
In Figure 86, Sim2 and Sim3 have been concatenated under the cube to a
potential volume of two terabytes.
Mir
1T
Ch 1
2T
XCh 2
2T
Ch 2
1T
Sim3
1T
Figure 86.
Resized Volume
Only one cube is created per resized simple or snapshot volume. Any
further simple volumes are added to the existing cube. In Figure 87, page
155 a second one-terabyte simple volume is added to the existing cube
created to resize Sim2.
154
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mir
1T
Sim1
2T
XSim2
3T
Sim2
1T
Sim3
1T
Sim4
1T
Figure 87.
Further Resizing on the Same Volume
If a volume to be resized is a concatenated volume, a cube is not created and
any volume type can be used except transparent or snapshot. In Figure 88,
a concatenated volume with a potential capacity of two terabytes is resized
to a potential capacity of three terabytes by the addition of a one-terabyte
child without first creating a cube. The actual capacity of the concatenated
volume remains unchanged until it is expanded to match its potential size.
Con
2T
Vol X
1T
Ch 1
1T
Ch 2
1T
Con
2T
Ch 3
1T
Ch 1
1T
Ch 2
1T
Figure 88.
Resizing a Concatenated Volume
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume resize
You need to define three parameters to resize a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Ch2
VOLUMEE
VOLUME TO RESIZE
MANDATORY
-a
XCh2
Sim
ALIAS
ALIAS OF RESIZED
VOLUME
OPTIONAL
IF NO NAME IS
GIVEN, THE
PREFIX X IS
ADDED TO THE
SOURCE NAME
-with
VOLUME
VOLUME TO RESIZE
WITH
MANDATORY
Example:
In Figure 89, page 157, the mirrored volume, Mir, is limited in its actual
capacity by its smallest child, Sim2. To resize Sim2 to two terabytes, simple
volume, Sim3, is concatenated to Sim2 to create the resized cube volume,
XSim 2.
volume resize –vol Sim2 –a XSim2 –with Sim3
156
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mir
1T
Sim1
2T
Sim2
1T
Sim3
1T
Mir
1T
Sim1
2T
XSim2
2T
Sim2
1T
Sim3
1T
Figure 89.
Resizing Mirrored Child
Retracting a Volume
After resizing a volume but before expanding its hierarchy, you can use the
CLI command volume retractto delete the added volume(s) used to
resize the original volume. The head of the volume hierarchy is retracted,
not the resized volume.
volume retract
You need to define one parameter to retract a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mir5
VOLUME
VOLUME TO
MANDATORY
RETRACT – HEAD
OF HIERARCHY
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Expanding a Volume
You must expand a volume’s actual capacity, its capacity as identified by
the file server, to match its resized potential capacity using the CLI
command volume expand. If you do not expand the resized volume, its
resized capacity will not be available for storage use. After expanding a
volume, its host’s file server will show its new capacity but the disk
partition will not expand automatically. The host must expand the disk
partition.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster, a
volume must be
expanded on both V-
Switches.
In Figure 90, a concatenated volume is expanded from two terabytes to an
actual capacity of three terabytes to match its resized potential capacity of
three terabytes.
Con
2T
Ch 3
1T
Ch 1
1T
Ch 2
1T
Con
3T
Ch 3
1T
Ch 1
1T
Ch 2
1T
Figure 90.
Expanding a Concatenated Volume
In Figure 91, page 159, a mirrored volume is expanded to two terabytes
after one of its child volumes was resized and expanded to two terabytes.
158
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mir
1T
Sim1
2T
XSim2
2T
Sim2
1T
Sim3
1T
Mir5
2T
Sim1
XSim2
2T
2T
Sim2
1T
Sim3
1T
Figure 91.
Expanding a Mirrored Volume
volume expand
You need to define one parameter to expand a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
XSim2
VOLUME
VOLUME TO EXPAND
MANDATORY
Example:
In Figure 92, page 160, the resized volume, XSim2, is expanded to an actual
capacity of two terabytes to match its resized potential capacity. Once
XSim2 is expanded, the capacity of Mir5 will automatically adjust itself to
two terabytes.
volume expand –vol XSim2
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mir
1T
Sim1
2T
XSim2
2T
Sim2
1T
Sim3
1T
Mir5
2T
Sim1
XSim2
2T
2T
Sim2
1T
Sim3
1T
Figure 92.
Expanding XSim2
160
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Notes
Chapter 8: Advanced Volume Operations
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Routine Volume Maintenance
Once you have begun creating volumes and managing your storage,
you may want to adjust or change certain parameters for more
effective storage management and utilization.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
VOLUMES
This chapter explains how to rename or remove volumes, LUNs,
iSCSI targets, identities and credentials.
TARGETS AND
EXPOSURE
Chapter 9: Routine Volume Maintenance
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volumes
Renaming a Volume
After creating a volume you can rename it. Renaming a volume will have
no negative effect on the volume hierarchies built on the renamed volume.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the volume must be
renamed on both V-
Switches.
volume set
You need to define two parameters to rename a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Concat1
VOLUME ALIAS
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO RENAME
MANDATORY
-n
JPGRepos
NEW ALIAS
NEW VOLUME ALIAS
MANDATORY
Example:
volume set –vol Concat1 –n JPGRepos
Removing a Volume
You can remove a volume. The volume must be inactive, that is not
exposed, and it must be at the top level of its volume hierarchy. For
example, you cannot remove a simple volume from within a set of
volumes creating a striped volume. The striped volume is at the top of the
hierarchy must be removed first.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the volume must be
removed on both V-
Switches.
volume remove
You need to define one parameter to remove a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Stripe1
VOLUME ALIAS
ALIAS OF TOP-
LEVEL VOLUME TO
REMOVE
MANDATORY
162
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
The top-level volume Stripe 1 is removed while the component volumes,
Simple 2, 4, 8 & 10, remain intact.
volume remove –vol Stripe1
Striped
Volume 1
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 6
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 1
Simple 1
Simple 7
Simple 9
Simple 3
Simple 2
Simple 8
Simple 10
Simple 4
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Simple 5
Simple 6
Simple 11
Simple 12
Figure 93.
Stripe 1 Volume Removed
Chapter 9: Routine Volume Maintenance
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing all Volumes in a Hierarchy
You can remove a volume and all of its component volumes in a volume
hierarchy. The volume must be at the top of the hierarchy. The volume
cannot be exposed; the volume LUN must be inactivated. Simple
volumes will convert back to subdisks.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the volume must be
removed on both V-
Switches.
volume remove -all
You need to define one parameter to remove all volumes within a volume
hierarchy:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-all
No parameter
required
ALL
ALL VOLUMES IN
HIERARCHY
MANDATORY
-vol
Stripe1
VOLUME ALIAS
ALIAS OF TOP-
LEVEL VOLUME TO
REMOVE
MANDATORY
Example:
The top-level volume Stripe 1 is removed along with its component
volumes, Simple 2, 4, 8 & 10.
volume remove -all –vol Stripe1
164
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Striped
Volume 1
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Disk 6
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 1
Simple 1
Simple 7
Simple 9
Simple 3
Simple 2
Simple 8
Simple 10
Simple 4
Disk 3
Disk 4
Disk 7
Disk 8
Simple 5
Simple 6
Simple 11
Simple 12
Figure 94.
Stripe 1 Volume and Supporting Hierarchy Removed
Replacing a Volume
You can replace a volume with another volume. Use the CLI command
volume replaceafter a disk failure to replace a volume used in a
storage hierarchy with a volume on a functional disk. This is only a
‘physical’ replacement. The data on the failed disk is not copied to the
new volume.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the volume must be
replaced on both V-
Switches.
If you are replacing a volume used as part of a mirrored volume, continue
with the CLI command volume mirror synch to synchronize the
replacement volume with the other mirrored volume(s). See
“Synchronizing a Volume,” page 166.
volume replace
You need to define two parameters to replace a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Simple4
VOLUME
VOLUME ON FAILED
DISK
MANDATORY
-nvol
Simple6
NEW VOLUME
REPLACEMENT
VOLUME
MANDATORY
Chapter 9: Routine Volume Maintenance
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronizing a Volume
You can replace a failed volume in a mirror. You must then synchronize
the new volume to the original mirrored volumes. See the working
example: “Replacing a Mirrored Volume,” page 256.
volume mirror sync
You need to define two parameters to synchronize a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
Simple3
SOURCE VOLUME
ORIGINAL VOLUME
TO SYNCHRONIZE
TO
MANDATORY
-dst
Simple5
DESTINATION
VOMUE
NEW VOLUME TO
ADD TO
MANDATORY
SYNCHRONINZE
Example:
The volume Simple3 is synchronized to the volume Simple5.
volume mirror sync –src Simple3 –dst Simple5
If you are working in a cluster, the volume will be displayed in the state
need sync on both V-Switches. Synchronize the volume on the exposing V-
Switch using the CLI command volume mirror sync. Perform a
dummy synchronization on the non-exposing V-Switch using the CLI
command volume mirror dummysync.
volume mirror dummysync
You need to define two parameters to dummy synchronize a volume:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
Mirror2
SOURCE
ALIAS OF SOURCE
VOLUME TO COPY
MANDATORY
-dst
Mirror8
DESTINATION
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO COPY TO
MANDATORY
166
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Targets and Exposure
Removing an LU
Before you can remove a volume, you must remove any attached LU.
If you remove LU 0
from a target, you will
inactivate the target
even if the target has
other attached LUs.
lu remove
You need to define two parameters to remove an LU:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
Accounting
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF TARGET
FROM WHICH TO
REMOVE LU
MANDATORY
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the LU must be
removed on both V-
Switches.
-lun
8
LOGICAL UNIT
NUMBER
LU TO REMOVE
FROM THE TARGET
MANDATORY
Example:
lu remove –ta Accounting –lun 8
Changing iSCSI Target Parameters
This command renames a target alias. Renaming the alias will have no
negative effect on the target exposure.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the target alias must
be changd on both V-
Switches.
iscsi target set
You need to define two parameters to rename an iSCSI target alias:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
accounting
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF TARGET
TO RENAME
MANDATORY
-na
finance
NEW ALIAS
NEW ALIAS FOR
TARGET
MANDATORY
Example:
The target alias accounting is renamed to finance.
iscsi target set –ta accounting –na finance
Chapter 9: Routine Volume Maintenance
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing an iSCSI Target
You can remove an iSCSI target provided it has no attached LU. Use the
CLI command lu removeto first remove any LUs from a target.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the target must be
removed on both V-
Switches.
iscsi target remove
You need to define one parameter to remove an iSCSI target:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
musicbox
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF ISCSI
TARGET TO REMOVE
MANDATORY
Example:
iscsi target remove –ta musicbox
Removing a RADIUS Server
Use the CLI command ip radius remove to remove a RADUIS server
from the V-Switch.
ip radius remove
You need to define one parameter to remove an iSNS server address:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.1
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
RADIUS SERVER
MANDATORY
-p
1812
PORT
UDP PORT FOR
SENDING REQUESTS
TO RADIUS
SERVER
MANDATORY
Removing an iSNS Server
Use the CLI command ip isns remove to remove an iSNS server from
the V-Switch iSNS client.
ip isns remove
You need to define one parameter to remove an iSNS server address:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.1
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
ISNS SERVER
MANDATORY
168
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Routine V-Switch Maintenance
Once you have configured the V-Switch, you need to be able to
update its configuration and maintain optimum V-Switch
functionality.
IN THIS
CHAPTER
GENERAL
CONFIGURATION
PARAMETERS
This chapter explains how to modify configuration parameters;
interface IP addresses, IP routing paths, cluster configurations and
replace a power supply.
TELNET PORT
SNMP MANAGER
ISNS SERVER
USER PROFILES
V-SWITCH
This chapter also explains how to upgrade the V-Switch software
and reboot the V-Switch in safe mode.
NETWORK
INTERFACES
IP ROUTING
DISKS AND SUBDISKS
CLUSTERS
V-SWITCH 3000
POWER SUPPLY
UPGRADING THE V-
SWITCH SOFTWARE
V-SWITCH 3000
COMPACT FLASH
SAFE MODE
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Configuration Parameters
After the initial V-Switch configuration, you may want to change one or
more of the V-Switch parameters. For example: You may need to change
the system clock to adjust to Daylight Savings Time. You can also use this
command to add contact information of whom to contact in the event of
technical difficulties.
This command is
available only after
the V-Switch is
initialized with the init
command.
device set
You can define or change thirteen parameters using this command:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-n
VSwitch1
NAME
USER-ASSIGNED
NAME FOR THE V-
SWITCH
OPTIONAL
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the changes must be
configured in both V-
Switches.
-ip
-im
-p
212.199.43.47
MANAGEMENT IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE MANAGEMENT
PORT
OPTIONAL
MANAGEMENT IP
MASK
IP MASK FOR THE
MANAGEMENT PORT
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
255.255.255.0
UDP PORT
PORT THROUGH
WHICH ALL UDP
COMMUNICATIONS
WILL FLOW –
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 161
NAMELY FOR SNMP
-if
INTERFACE ALIAS
ALIAS OF PORT FOR
MANAGING V-
SWITCH
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: MGMT
(ETH1 OR
MGMT)
-d
-t
-c
21/07/2002
13:30
DATE
LOCAL DATE
LOCAL TIME
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
TIME
AnnaLevin
CONTACT
CONTACT PERSON
IN THE EVENT OF A
SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
-loc
ext4838
LOCATION
LOCATION OF THE
CONTACT PERSON
OPTIONAL
170
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-rld
no
REPORT LUN
DISCOVERY
MODE FOR
OPTIONAL
DISCOVERING
DEVICE LUNS
YES OR NO
DEFAULT: YES
-telnet
-rcom
1597
TELNET PORT
PORT FOR V-
SWITCH
COMMUNICATIONS
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 23
READ
COMMUNITY TO
OPTIONAL
COMMUNITY
GET INFORMATION
DEFAULT:
PUBLIC
-wcom
WRITE
COMMUNITY TO SET
INFORMATION
OPTIONAL
COMMUNITY
DEFAULT:
PRIVATE
Example:
The V-Switch is named V-Switch 1 at 13:30 in the afternoon on 21 March
2002. Its management port, eth1, has the IP address 212.199.43.46. Anna
Levin, at phone extension 4838 is the contact person in the event of technical
difficulties.
device set –n VSwitch1 –ip 212.199.43.46 –d 21/04/2004 –
t 13:30 –c AnnaLevin. –loc ext4838 –if eth1
Telnet Port
If your Telnet communications connection to the V-Switch traverses a
firewall, the standard Telnet communications port 23 may be blocked by
the firewall as a security measure. To enable Telnet communications to
the V-Switch, you can designate an alternate port using the CLI command
device set -telnet. This port can be opened in the firewall for
dedicated Telnet-V-Switch communications.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the interface alias
must be changed on
both V-Switches.
device set -telnet
Example:
The port 1597 is programmed as the Telnet communications port.
device set -telnet 1597
Use the CLI command infoto check the V-Switch’s designated Telnet port.
info
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 29:
V-Switch Configuration
Parameter
Name
Value
VSwitch1
Description
Contact
SDC HW 1.0 SW 1.0
Anna Levin
Location
Status
Ext. 4838
OK
Object ID
1.3.6.1.4.1 10059 1.1.2
Time Since Last Reset 12 days 17 hours 29 min 32 sec
Mgmt IP Address
Mgmt UDP Port
212.199.43.47
161
Date & Time [DD/MM/YY] 21/04/04 13:33
Telnet Port
Eth
1597
Up
FC
Up
Read Community
Write Community
Public
Private
172
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Manager
Setting an SNMP Manager
This command modifies parameters of existing managers.
snmp manager set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.96
IP ADDRESS
MANAGER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-p
150
151
UPD PORT
PORT TO RECEIVE
TRAPS THROUGH
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 162
-np
NEW PORT
NEW PORT FOR
OPTIONAL
RECEIVING TRAPS
-rcom
READ COMMUNITY
COMMUNITY TO
OPTIONAL
GET INFORMATION
DEFAULT:
PUBLIC
-wcom
-trap
WRITE COMMUNITY
COMMUNITY TO SET
INFORMATION
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
PRIVATE
TRAP
TO SEND TRAPS TO
MANAGER
OPTIONAL
YES: SEND
NO: DO NOT
SEND
DEFAULT: YES
Removing an SNMP Manager
This command removes a manager from the V-Switch.
snmp manager remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.96
IP ADDRESS
MANAGER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-p
162
UDP PORT
PORT TO RECEIVE
TRAPS THROUGH
MANDATORY
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iSNS Server
The V-Switch supports Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) protocol for
advertising its targets and portals on the iSNS server to enable iSCSI
initiators in the IP-SAN to locate the V-Switch targets automatically.
Adding an iSNS Server
Use the CLI command ip isns addto add an iSCSI server to the V-
Switch’s iSNS client. Targets defined by the V-Switch’s Access Control List
(ACL) as having controlled access are accessible only to those servers
defined as having access to the target
ip isns add
You need to define one parameter to add an iSNS server address:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.1
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
ISNS SERVER
MANDATORY
Removing an iSNS Server
Use the CLI command ip isns removeto remove an iSNS server from
the V-Switch iSNS client.
ip isns remove
You need to define one parameter to remove an iSNS server address:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.1
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
ISNS SERVER
MANDATORY
User Profiles
Access to the V-Switch is password protected. The V-Switch ships with
the default user name sanrad and the default user password sanrad. After
logging in, a total of ten user profiles (name plus password) can be
configured on a V-Switch. As needed, profiles can be modified or
removed.
The user name can have from one to twenty characters. The user password
can have from six to twelve characters. Both fields are case sensitive and
accept all characters, including spaces.
174
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a User Profile
A total of ten user profiles can be configured on a V-Switch. Use the CLI
command admin addto add a user login profile
All CLI names and
aliases are case
sensitive.
admin add
You must define two parameters to add a user profile:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-un
Joe Cool
USER NAME
USER NAME
MANDATORY
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster, a
user profile must be
added on both V-
Switches.
-pw
123456
PASSWORD
USER PASSWORD
MANDATORY
Example:
admin add –un Joe Cool –pw 123456
Changing a User Profile
This interactive command enables a user to change their login password
for their user name on the V-Switch.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster, a
user profile must be
changed on both V-
Switches
admin password
After entering the command, you are prompted to enter your existing
password and the new password.
Removing a User Profile
You can remove any user profile from the V-Switch database except the
profile you are logged in with. This ensures at least one user profile in the
database at all times.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster, a
user profile must be
changed on both V-
Switches
admin remove
You must define one parameter to remove a user profile:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-un
Joe Cool
USER NAME
USER NAME
MANDATORY
Example:
admin remove –un Joe Cool
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V-Switch
Resetting a V-Switch
You can perform a remote soft reset on the V-Switch using the CLI reset
command. All configuration databases will be maintained on the V-Switch,
including user names and passwords; network port aliases; configured
volumes and iSCSI targets.
reset
Saving (Uploading) a V-Switch Database File
You can upload a copy of a V-Switch’s full database file to the local TFTP
server. If the V-Switch fails, its database file can be downloaded to the
replacement V-Switch. This eliminates protracted configuration time on the
new V-Switch and ensures configuration integrity.
Use the CLI command ft upload to upload a V-Switch’s full database
file
ft upload
You need to define three parameters to upload a database file:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
STATION WHERE
TFTP APPLICATION
SITS
MANDATORY
-fn
-ft
VSwitch/v1_9/
v1_9database
FILE NAME
FILE TYPE
COMPLETE PATH
AND NAME TO SAVE
FILE AS
MANDATORY
OPTIONAL
db
FORMAT TO SAVE
DATA IN
DEFAULT: DB
(DATA BASE)
Example:
Upload the file v1_9dat as a database file to the tftp server at 212.199.43.70.
ft upload –ip 212.199.43.70 –fn VSwitch/v1_9/
v1_9database –ft db
176
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downloading a V-Switch Configuration File
After replacing a failed V-Switch, you can download the replaced V-
Switch database file from the tftp server to the new V-Switch. Unlike a
standard V-Switch installation, do not connect the V-Switch to the storage
devices before powering up. You first download the database file and
then connect the V-Switch to the storage devices. This ensures that
autodiscovery will not assign default aliases different from the replaced V-
Switch to the discovered disks.
Download the
database file to the
V-Switch before
attaching it to the
storage devices.
Use the CLI command ftdownloadto download a V-Switch database
The V-Switch must
be reset for the file from the local TFTP server after you have initialized the replacement
downloaded
database to become
operational.
V-Switch with an IP management address via LCD or Console.
Please refer to “Configuring the V-Switch 3000 Management Parameters via
LCD,” page 48, and“Configuring the Management Console,” page 49, for
more information on initializing your V-Switch before downloading the
configuration file.
The download parameters are identical to the upload parameters.
ft download
You need to define three parameters to download a configuration file:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
TELNET STATION
WHERE TFTP
MANDATORY
APPLICATION SITS
-fn
-ft
VSwitch/v1_9/
v1_9database
FILE NAME
FILE TYPE
COMPLETE PATH
AND NAME TO FILE
LOCATION
MANDATORY
OPTIONAL
db
FORMAT TO SAVE
DATA IN
DEFAULT: DB
(DATA BASE)
Example:
Download the file v1_9database as a database file from the tftp server at
212.199.43.70.
ft download –ip 212.199.43.70 –fn VSwitch/v1_9/
v1_9database –ft db
Network Interfaces
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing an Interface Alias
You can change the alias of a V-Switch interface for user convenience.
Leaving the new alias field blank will return the alias to its default setting
All CLI names and
aliases are case
sensitive.
interface set
You need to define two parameters to change an interface alias:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
fc1
INTERFACE ALIAS
OR NAME
CURRENT ALIAS OR
NAME OF
MANDATORY
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the interface alias
must be changed on
both V-Switches.
INTERFACE
-na
Storage1
NEW ALIAS
NEW ALIAS OR
NAME OF
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
DEFAULT
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
NAMES – CONS,
MGMT,
FC1,SCSI1,ETH1
Example:
The storage interface, fc1 is renamed to Storage 1.
interface set –if fc1 –na Storage1
Adding an Interface IP Address
You can assign more than one IP address to each network port.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the interface IP must
be added on both V-
Switches.
ip config set
You need to define three parameters to configure each network port:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
eth1
INTERFACE ALIAS
NETWORK
MANDATORY
ETH1, ETH2,
ETH3
Executing this
command on the
same network port
with a different IP
address will not reset
the network port
address. It will add
another IP address to
the network port
INTERFACE PORT
-ip
212.199.43.57
IP ADDRESS
IP MASK
IP ADDRESS
ASSIGNING TO THE
MANDATORY
INTERFACE PORT
-im
IP NET MASK
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
255.255.255.0
-act
1
ACTIVITY
IF IP ADDRESS IS
ACTIVE TO EXPOSE
VOLUMES. USE
INACTIVE STATUS
TO ALLOW
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 1
(ACTIVE).
2(INACTIVE)
FAILOVER.
178
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
IP address 212.199.43.57 is added to interface eth1 for a total of two IP
addresses assigned to interface eth1.
ip config set –if eth1 –ip 212.199.43.57
212.199.43.46
212.199.75.66
212.199.43.56
212.199.43.57
212.199.12.67
212.199.12.70
Figure 95.
Adding an Interface IP Address
Removing an Interface IP Address
You can remove an IP address from the network ports.
ip config remove
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the interface IP must
be removed on both
V-Switches.
You need to define one parameter to remove a network port IP address:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.12.70
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS TO
REMOVE FROM THE
NETWORK
MANDATORY
INTERFACE PORT
Example:
The second IP address, 212.199.43.70, on the network interface eth3 is
removed.
ip config remove–ip 212.199.12.70
212.199.43.46
212.199.75.66
212.199.43.56
212.199.43.57
212.199.12.67
212.199.12.70
Figure 96.
Removing an IP Address
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Routing
Adding an IP route
You can add an IP route to a network port.
ip route add
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the IP route must be
added on both V-
Switches.
You need to define four parameters to add an IP route:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-dip
10.10.20.20
DESTINATION IP
IP OF HOST
STATION
MANDATORY
-dmask
-gw
255.255.255.0
30.30.20.20
DESTINATION
MASK
IP MASK OF HOST
STATION
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE GATEWAY
ROUTER
-if
eth2
INTERFACE
ALIAS
NETWORK PORT TO
OPEN
MANDATORY
COMMUNICATION
THROUGH
Example:
An IP routing path to Network D, IP 10.10.20.20, (IP mask 255.255.255.0) is
mapped from network port Eth2 through router gateway 30.30.20.20.
ip route add –dip 10.10.20.20 –dmask 255.255.255.0 –gw
30.30.20.20 –if eth2
Removing an IP route
You can remove an IP route to a network.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the IP route must be
removed on both V-
Switches.
ip route remove
You need to define four parameters to remove an IP routing path
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-dip
10.10.20.20
DESTINATION IP
DESTINATION
NETWORK IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-dmask
255.255.255.0
DESTINATION
MASK
DESTINATION
MANDATORY
NETWORK IP MASK
180
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-gw
-if
30.30.20.20
eth2
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE GATEWAY
ROUTER
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
INTERFACE
ALIAS
INTERFACE ALIAS
ROUTING PATH
MAPS TO
Example:
The IP route from network port Eth2 to external network 10.10.20.20, with
IP mask 255.255.255.0 is removed from Eth2.
ip route remove –dip 10.10.20.20 –dmask 255.255.255.0
–gw 30.30.20.20 –if eth2
Disks and Subdisks
Discovering Storage Devices
The V-Switch default algorithm for storage devices discovery is using the
SCSI command REPORT LUNS. Certain storage devices either do not
support this command or do not respond according to the SCSI standard.
To discover these devices, the REPORT LUNs command must be disabled.
If certain devices in the SAN are not being discovered by the V-Switch, use
the CLI command device set to disable or re-enable device discovery
via REPORT LUNs.
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
device set
You need to define one parameter to change the V-Switch storage device
discovery mode:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-rld
no
REPORT LUN
DISCOVERY
MODE FOR
MANDATORY
YES OR NO
DISCOVERING
DEVICE LUNS
DEFAULT: YES
See “device set,” page 200, for the full list of switch parameters for the CLI
command device set.
Renaming a Storage Device
You can rename a disk. Renaming the disk will have no effect on the
volume hierarchies built on the disk.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the disk must be
renamed on both V-
Switches.
storage set
You need to define three parameters to rename a disk:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Stor_1
STORAGE ALIAS
STORAGE ALIAS TO
MODIFY
MANDATORY
-na
RAID1
NEW ALIAS
NEW ALIAS FOR
STORAGEK
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
-info
Expose_as
_transparent
INFORMATION
INFORMATION TO
ASSIGN TO
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
STORAGE DEVICE
Example:
The disk, Stor_1, is renamed to RAID1 and a note is made for the storage
manager to expose this disk as a transparent volume.
storage set –s Stor_1 –na RAID1 –info Expose_as
_transparent
182
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing a Storage Device
You can remove a disk from the V-Switch database. The disk must be
defined as missing to remove it.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the disk must be
removed on both V-
Switches.
storage remove
You need to define one parameter to remove a disk:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
MANDATORY
ALIAS OF STORAGE
TO REMOVE
STORAGE
-s
Stor_1
Example:
Disk named Stor_1 is removed from the V-Switch database.
storage remove –s Stor_1
Renaming a Subdisk
After creating a subdisk you can rename it. Renaming the subdisk will
have no effect on the volume hierarchy built on the subdisk.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the subdisk must be
renamed on both V-
Switches.
subdisk set
You need to define three parameters to rename a subdisk:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-sd
Subdisk7
SUBDISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF SUBDISK
TO RENAME
MANDATORY
-na
Sub7
NEW SUBDISK ALIAS
INFORMATION
NEW ALIAS OF
SUBDISK
MANDATORY
OPTIONAL
-info
replaces_sub3
INFORMATION ON
SUBDISK FOR LOCAL
ADMINISTRATION
ONLY
Removing a Subdisk
You can remove a subdisk to repartition a disk.
If you are working in
a V-Switch cluster,
the subdisk must be
removed on both V-
Switches
subdisk remove
You need to define one parameter to remove a subdisk:
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-sd
Subdisk4
SUBDISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF SUBDISK
TO DELETE
MANDATORY
Clusters
Modifying Neighbor Parameters
You can modify neighbor parameters in a cluster.
neighbor set
You need to define up to two parameters to modify a neighbor’s
parameters in a cluster:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
NewVSwitch
NEIGHBOR
ALIAS OF
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
NEIGHBORING V-
SWITCH IN
CLUSTER
-ip
212.199.43.40
IP ADDRESS
MANAGEMENT IP
ADDRESS OF
NEIGHBOR
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
Removing a Neighbor
You can remove a neighbor from a cluster.
Both V-Switches
must have its
neighbor removed.
neighbor remove
You need to define one parameter to remove a neighbor from a cluster:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
NewVSwitch
NEIGHBOR
ALIAS OF
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
NEIGHBORING V-
SWITCH IN
CLUSTER
184
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying a Cluster
You can modify a cluster’s parameters.
Both V-Switches in
the cluster must be
modified.
cluster set
You need to define three parameters to modify a cluster’s parameters:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-kai
5
KEEP ALIVE
INTERVAL
TIME BETWEEN
ALIVE SIGNALS
FROM NEIGHBORS
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
-sint
-fint
10
10
SUSPICIOUS
INTERVAL
TIME FROM WHEN A
SIGNAL WAS
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
EXPECTED BUT NOT
RECEIVED
FAILOVER INTERVAL
TIME WHEN
SUSPICIOUS
INTERVAL IS
EXCEEDED
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
Enabling and Disabling Failover
If you want to break a cluster or need to take a V-Switch off-line, you must
first disable V-Switch failover. Use the CLI command cluster failover
disableto disable this functionality. This command must be executed on
both V-Switches in the cluster.
cluster failover disable
If you want to restore a cluster or after you bring the V-Switch back on-line,
you need to re-enable the failover functionality. Use the CLI command
cluster failover enableto re-enable this functionality. This
command must be executed on both V-Switches in the cluster.
cluster failover enable
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V-Switch 3000 Power Supply
The V-Switch 3000 is standard-issued with two hot-swappable AC power
supplies. If one of the power supplies fail, its red LED on the back panel
turns off. If both of the power supplies fail, the Power LED on the front
panel turns off.
STEP 1.
DISCONNECT THE POWER CABLE
Disconnect the power cable from the power source. After the power cable is
disconnected from the power source, disconnect the power cable from the V-
Switch.
STEP 2.
LOOSEN THE POWER SUPPLY CONNECTING SCREW
Loosen the power supply connecting screw to release the power supply from
the V-Switch.
STEP 3.
REMOVE THE POWER SUPPLY
Lift the power supply handle and pull to slide the power supply out
connecting
screw
handle
Figure 97.
Replacing a Power Supply
STEP 4.
INSERT A FUNCTIONING COMPATIBLE POWER SUPPLY AND SECURE
Insert a functioning compatible power supply. Secure the power supply to the
V-Switch.
It is now safe to reconnect the power cable to the power supply and power
source.
186
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrading the V-Switch Software
You can upgrade the V-Switch software via CLI. The software upgrade
files are first downloaded from the TFTP server. You can then use the CLI
command ft update to upgrade the V-Switch software. There are a
total of six upgrade files. Do not change their names or the V-Switch will
not be able to perform the upgrade.
The V-Switch must
be reset for the new
software to begin
functioning.
All configured user profiles are unaffected by the software upgrade.
ft update
You need two parameters to upgrade the V-Switch software:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.46
IP ADDRESS
TFTP SERVER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-fd
sanrad/update
/v2_0/
DIRECTORY
DIRECTORY TO
OPTIONAL
TAKE FILES FROM
Example:
ft update –ip 212.199.43.46 –fd sanrad/update/v2_0/
After upgrading the software, the V-Switch must be reset for the new
software to begin functioning. Use the CLI command resetto reset the V-
Switch.
reset
Use the CLI command infoto view the software version to confirm that
the software has successfully upgraded.
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V-Switch 3000 Compact Flash
The V-Switch 3000 includes a compact flash for backing up the database to
provide redundancy and for backing up the application before upgrading
the software. The V-Switch 3000 has two permanent memory devices: flash
and compact flash. The V-Switch can work with only the flash. When both
are present, the V-Switch reads from the flash and can be set to write to
both the flash and the compact flash. Use the CLI command system set
to replicate the database from the flash on to the compact flash.
When set to replicate mode, the V-Switch copies the current database from
the flash to the compact flash. Any configuration changes done to the
database will automatically be updated to the compact flash as well.
system set
You need to define one parameter to set the replication mode:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-rep
yes
REPLICATE
REPLICATION OF
THE DATABASE
MANDATORY
YES: REPLICATE
NO: DO NOT
REPLICATE
system set –rep yes
If the compact flash is removed while the V-Switch is in replicate mode, it
will automatically switch to non-replicate mode, even if the compact flash is
re-inserted. Repeat the command system setto return to replicate mode.
At initialization in replication mode, the V-Switch checks both copies of the
database. If they are different, the V-Switch switches to non-replicate mode
to prevent erasing the compact flash.
The V-Switch’s database, application and configuration files can also be
copied from flash to compact flash or compact flash to flash. Use the CLI
command system copyto copy each file type separately.
Use the CLI command system copyto copy a file between the flash and
the compact flash.
188
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
system copy
You need to define two parameters to copy a file between the flash and
compact flash:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-from
cflash
FROM
WHERE TO COPY
FROM
MANDATORY
FLASH
CFLASH
-type
db
TYPE
TYPE OF FILE TO
COPY
MANDATORY
DB: DATABASE
AF:
APPLICATION
FILE
CF:
CONFIGURATION
FILE
system copy –from cflash –type db
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safe Mode
The V-Switch operating status includes the ability to enter into safe mode in
the event of booting problems or in an attempt to clear significant amounts
of a V-Switch configuration. There are two ways to enter safe mode:
ꢀ
ꢀ
Automatically during a reboot.
Manually via CLI.
There are four safe mode reboot options:
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Level 0: Reboot in normal mode.
Level 1: Reboot with last good configuration.
Level 2: Reboot with default factory database.
Level 3: Reboot with default factory system.
Automatic Safe Mode
When the V-Switch reboots, either after upgrading the V-Switch software or
any other time that environmental irregularities require, there may be
database corruption. To prevent potential damage to the database, the V-
Switch enters safe mode.
Safe mode can only be navigated from a console with a local, direct RS232
connection to the V-Switch.
When a V-Switch has boot problems and enters safe mode, its LCD panel
displays:
Init Problem
Safe Mode
Level 0: Reboot in Normal Mode
If the V-Switch is rebooted during initialization it will reboot in safe mode 0.
This gives the V-Switch another opportunity to try to reboot normally in the
event that there are in fact no problems with the database.
Level 1: Reboot with Last Good Configuration
Each time the V-Switch successfully boots up, it saves the database as the
last good configuration. If the last time the V-Switch booted was also the
first time the V-Switch booted, the database will be empty. All V-Switch
configurations will be lost. Therefore, SANRAD strongly urges you to
reboot the V-Switch after major configurations to save the configuration
database in the event of rebooting problems in the future.
Save the V-Switch
configurations to the
database as the last
good configuration by
reboot after major
configurations.
Rebooting with the last good configuration may cause data corruption. For
example, the last good configuration may contain a striped volume
composed of two children. Since the last good configuration, that striped
volume has been reconfigured to include three children. If the V-Switch
190
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reboots with the last good configuration, all data written on the third child
will be lost.
The suspicious database is saved and can then be exported to SANRAD technical
support for examination using the CLI command ft export problemafter
initializing the V-Switch. Please see “Level 4:
Level 5:
If the V-Switch enters a reboot loop, after a given number of times, the reboot loop will
be stopped and the V-Switch will enter safe mode 5. A reboot loop is most often
caused by the connection of a problematic device to the V-Switch. In addition to
contacting Technical Support, SANRAD recommends disconnecting storage and
Ethernet connections and rebooting the V-Switch. If the V-Switch reboots without
problems, an attached device is the culprit.
Exporting a Corrupted Database,” page 191.
Level 2: Reboot with Default Factory Database
This is the recommended option.
This does not clear
user login profiles.
This clears the database of all configurations that may have been done, e.g.
IP addresses, subdisks, volumes and targets. The suspicious database is
copied to the directory corrupted database where it can then be exported
to SANRAD technical support for examination using the CLI command ft
export problemafter initializing the V-Switch.
Level 3: Reboot with Default Factory System
This clears the database of all configurations executed on the V-Switch,
including user login profiles. You will have to log in with the user name
sanrad and password sanrad.
This clears all user
login profiles. You
will have to login with
the user name
sanrad and password
sanrad.
Level 4:
Level 5:
If the V-Switch enters a reboot loop, after a given number of times, the
reboot loop will be stopped and the V-Switch will enter safe mode 5. A
reboot loop is most often caused by the connection of a problematic device
to the V-Switch. In addition to contacting Technical Support, SANRAD
recommends disconnecting storage and Ethernet connections and rebooting
the V-Switch. If the V-Switch reboots without problems, an attached device
is the culprit.
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exporting a Corrupted Database
After you reboot the V-Switch from safe mode level 1 or 2, you can use the
CLI command ft export problem to export the potentially corrupted
database to SANRAD technical support for examination.
If you rebooted in safe mode level 1 (last good configuration), the last good
database file and the corrupted database file are exported for examination.
If you rebooted in safe mode level 2 (reboot with default factory database),
the corrupted database file is exported for examination.
ft export problem
You need two parameters to export a corrupted database from the V-
Switch:
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
SERVER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-fd
Corrupted_DB
FILE DIRECTORY
DIRECTORY TO
MANDATORY
EXPORT FILES TO
Example
The suspicious database is exported to the directory Corrupted_DB at IP
address 212.199.43.70.
ft export problem –ip 212.199.43.70 –fd Corrupted_DB
Manual Safe Mode
You can use the CLI to clear a V-Switch’s database to varying degrees. This
is useful if you want to change the physical storage pool managed by a V-
Switch or make substantial changes to the virtualization configuration.
Safe mode levels 0 and 1 can be executed from any Telnet station but, for
extra safety, safe mode levels 2 and 3 can only be executed from a console
with a local, direct RS232 connection to the V-Switch.
system boot
You need one parameter to reboot the V-Switch in safe mode.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
192
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-sm
1
SAFE MODE
SAFE MODE LEVEL
MANDATORY
0:NORMAL
1: LAST GOOD
CONFIGURATION
2: DEFAULT
DATABASE
3: DEFAULT
FACTORY
SYSTEM
Level O: Normal Mode
This is the same as resetting the V-Switch. No change is made to the V-
Switch configuration.
Level 1: Last Good Configuration
Each time the V-Switch successfully boots up, it saves the database as the
last good configuration. If the last time the V-Switch booted was also the
first time, the database will be empty. Use this level to erase all
configurations executed since the last reboot and return to the previous V-
Switch configuration.
For example, if you are modifying or making temporary changes to the V-
Switch configuration, first ensure that the current configuration is stored in
the V-Switch by resetting the V-Switch then execute the changes. If the
changes are no longer desirable, reboot in this level.
Level 2: Default Factory Database
This clears the database of all configurations expect user login profiles.
Use this level to erase all virtual configurations expect the user profiles.
A direct RS232
connection is
necessary.
For example, if you want to transfer the V-Switch to a different physical
storage pool within a campus, this level will prepare the V-Switch for its
new configuration while maintaining the same user profiles of the same
system administrators.
Level 3: Default Factory System
This clears the database of all configurations executed on the V-Switch,
including user login profiles. Use this level if you want to completely
clear a V-Switch’s database.
A direct RS232
connection is
necessary.
For example, if you want to transfer a V-Switch to another branch office or
campus department with different system administrators, this level will
return the V-Switch to the same state it left the factory for shipping.
Chapter 10: Routine V-Switch Maintenance
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Notes
194
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Command Line Interface
The CLI is available via:
IN THIS
CHAPTER
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Console port with a direct RS232 connection.
1Gbit Ethernet network port (eth1) with a Telnet session.
10/100 Ethernet Management port with a Telnet session.
V SWITCH
CONFIGURATION
VOLUME
CONFIGURATION
The CLI is used to implement all V Switch management functions,
including switching, virtualization and security.
VOLUME EXPOSURE
All CLI commands are case sensitive and must be entered in lower case.
Inputted data can include upper case letters but must always subsequently
be entered in the same case.
The CLI command prompt is >.
All CLI commands in this manual are listed first with the basic command
followed by a table of command switches; their explanations; status
(mandatory or optional) and an example for each command switch.
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CLI supports the use of the following hot keys for the listed functions:
Table 30:
Hot Keys
Description
Command
LIST OF COMMANDS WITH A SHORT DESCRIPTION OF EACH
RETURN TO MAIN MENU
?
!
ABORT CURRENT COMMAND
Esc
#
DISPLAY LAST COMMAND TO VIEW COMMAND HISTORY
COMPLETE A COMMAND TO THE POINT OF AMBIGUITY
Tab
196
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V Switch Configuration
These commands enable you to configure and view the basic V Switch
parameters needed to operate the V Switch
COMMAND
COMMAND
INIT
IP CONFIG REMOVE
IP ROUTE ADD
ADMIN SHOW
ADMIN ADD
IP ROUTE SHOW
IP ROUTE REMOVE
IP ISNS SHOW
ADMIN REMOVE
ADMIN PASSWORD
RESET
IP ISNS ADD
INFO
IP ISNS REMOVE
NEIGHBOR ADD
NEIGHBOR SET
NEIGHBOR SHOW
NEIGHBOR DETAILS
NEIGHBOR REMOVE
CLUSTER SHOW
CLUSTER SET
DEVICE SET
DEVICE SET -TELNET
FC INTERFACE SHOW
FC NODE SHOW
FC SET SPEED
INTERFACE SHOW
INTERFACE DETAILS
INTERFACE SET
PSCSI SHOW
CLUSTER FAILOVER ENABLE
FT SHOW
PSCSI SET BUSID
SNMP MANAGER SHOW
SNMP MANAGER ADD
SNMP MANAGER SET
SNMP MANAGER REMOVE
IP CONFIG SHOW
IP CONFIG SET
FT DOWNLOAD
FT EXPORT PROBLEM
SYSTEM BOOT
SYSTEM SET
SYSTEM COPY
SYSTEM SHOW
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
init
This command initializes the most basic V Switch parameters needed to
begin managing the V Switch operations via the management port. This
command is executed via RS232 connection to a console.
This command can only be executed once. This command is unavailable
once the basic V Switch parameters are set.
If the V Switch management IP address and mask are set using the LED, the
V Switch name is set to the default V Switchand this command will not
be available. Use the CLI command device setto change the basic V
Switch parameters.
init
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-n
VSwitch1
NAME
USER-ASSIGNED
NAME FOR THE V
SWITCH
MANDATORY
-ip
-im
-p
212.199.43.46
MANAGEMENT IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE MANAGEMENT
PORT
MANDATORY
MANAGEMENT IP
MASK
IP MASK FOR THE
MANAGEMENT PORT
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
255.255.255.0
UDP PORT
PORT THROUGH
WHICH ALL UDP
COMMUNICATIONS
WILL FLOW –
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 161
NAMELY FOR SNMP
-if
INTERFACE ALIAS
ALIAS OF
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT :
ETH1
MANAGEMENT
INTERFACE
Example
init –n VSwitch1 –ip 212.199.43.46
admin show
This command shows all valid user login names for the V Switch.
admin show
Table 31:
Administrator User Names
User Name
Joe Cool
Cyber Dude
198
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Name
MI5
CUL8R
C6H12O6
admin add
This command adds a user name to the list of valid user login names for the
V Switch. A user name can be from 1 to 20 characters long, including
spaces. A password can be from 6 to 12 characters long, including spaces.
admin add
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-un
Joe Cool
USER NAME
USER NAME
MANDATORY
-pw
123456
PASSWORD
USER PASSWORD
MANDATORY
Example
admin add –un Joe Cool –pw 123456
admin remove
This command deletes a user name from the list of valid user login names
for the V Switch. Any user name, except the logged in user name, can be
deleted.
admin remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-un
Joe Cool
USER NAME
USER NAME
MANDATORY
Example
admin remove –un Joe Cool
admin password
This interactive command enables a user to change their login password for
their user name on the V Switch. You can only change the password of the
current active user.
admin password
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reset
This command performs a remote soft reset of the V Switch. All
configuration databases will be maintained on the V Switch, including user
names and passwords; network port aliases; configured volumes and
iSCSI targets.
reset
info
This command displays the current V Switch configuration, including
whom to contact in the event of technical difficulties.
info
Table 32:
iSCSI V Switch Configuration
Parameter
Name
Value
V Switch1
Description
Contact
High Performance V Switch
Anna Levin
Location
Status
Ext. 4838
OK
Object ID
1.3.6.1.4.1.10059.1.1.2
Time Since Last Reset 5 days 1 h:29 m:49 sec
Mgmt IP Address
Mgmt UDP Port
Date & Time
212.199.43.46
161
24/03/02 15:37
23
Telnet Port
device set
This command redefines the specified general parameters of the V Switch.
device set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-n
VSwitch1
NAME
USER-ASSIGNED
NAME FOR THE V
SWITCH
OPTIONAL
-ip
-im
212.199.43.46
MANAGEMENT IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE MANAGEMENT
PORT
OPTIONAL
MANAGEMENT IP
MASK
IP MASK FOR THE
MANAGEMENT PORT
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
255.255.255.0
200
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-p
UDP PORT
PORT THROUGH
WHICH ALL UDP
COMMUNICATIONS
WILL FLOW –
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 161
NAMELY FOR SNMP
-d
-t
-c
21/04/2002
13:30
DATE
LOCAL DATE
LOCAL TIME
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
TIME
AnnaLevin
CONTACT
CONTACT PERSON
IN THE EVENT OF A
SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
-loc
-if
ext4838
eth1
no
LOCATION
LOCATION OF THE
CONTACT PERSON
OPTIONAL
MANAGEMENT
MANAGEMENT PORT
NAME
MANDATORY
ETH1
INTERFACE ALIAS
-rld
REPORT LUN
DISCOVERY
MODE FOR
MANDATORY
YES OR NO
DISCOVERING
DEVICE LUNS
DEFAULT: YES
Example
device set –n VSwitch1 –ip 212.199.43.46 –d 21/04/2002 –
t 13:30 –c AnnaLevin. –loc ext4838 –if eth1 –rld no
device set -telnet
This command changes the Telnet port from the default port number to a
user defined port number. Establishing a Telnet connection on an alternate
port (not the expected port 23) provides increased line security.
device set -telnet
Example
device set -telnet 49155
fc interface show
This command shows each FC port and its World Wide Port Name
(WWPN).
fc interface show
Alias
fc2
WWPN
20:00:00:20:38:00:10:64
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
fc node show
This command shows the V Switch World Wide Node Name (WWNN).
fc node show
Name
V Switch1
Description
SW Version 1.5, build 5,patch 0
Board version 1, PCB version
WWNN
20:00:20:10:58:00:10:46
Gateway
Function
fc set speed
This command allows you to set the speed of the FC communication.
fc set speed
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
fc2
INTERFACE
STORAGE PORT
MANDATORY
-sp
1
SPEED
FC
MANDATORY
1 GB: 1
COMMUNICATION
SPEED
2 GB: 2
DEFAULT: 1
interface show
This command shows the V Switch interfaces (ports) and their parameters.
interface show
Table 33:
V Switch Interfaces
Name Description
cons RS232 Management Int cons 000000000000
Type
Alias Phys Address
RS232
ETHERNET mgmt Fast Ethernet Manage mgmt 000000000000
FibreChannel fc1
FibreChannel fc2
FibreChannel fc3
FibreChannel fc4
FibreChannel fc5
FibreChannel fc6
FC MMF
FC MMF
FC MMF
FC MMF
FC MMF
FC MMF
fc1 000000000000
fc2 000000000000
fc3 000000000000
fc4 000000000000
fc5 000000000000
fc6 000000000000
ETHERNET eth1 Gigabit Ethernet Net eth1 00081a000110
ETHERNET eth2 Gigabit Ethernet Net eth2 00081a000111
ETHERNET eth3 Gigabit Ethernet Net eth3 00081a000112
202
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
interface details
This command lists the interface details of a specified interface.
interface details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
eth1
INTERFACE ALIAS
ALIAS OF
INTERFACE TO
SHOW
MANDATORY
Table 34:
Interface Details
Parameter
Name:
Details
eth1
Alias:
eth1
Index:
9
Type:
ETHERNET
Description:
Phys Address:
MTU:
Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface
0081a000110
1500
up
Admin Status:
Oper. Status:
up
interface set
This command renames the specified interface alias.
interface set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
Storage1
INTERFACE ALIAS
OR NAME
CURRENT ALIAS OR
NAME OF
MANDATORY
INTERFACE
-na
fc1
NEW ALIAS
NEW ALIAS OR
NAME OF
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
DEFAULT
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
NAMES – CONS,
MGMT,
FC1,ETH1
pscsi show
This command displays at parallel SCSI devices and their bus ID number.
pscsi show
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 35:
Parallel SCSI Device Bus IDs
Alias
BusID
12
pscsi3
pscsi4
7
pscsi set busid
This command assigns a bus ID to a parallel SCSI device.
pscsi set busid
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-if
pscsi3
INTERFACE
STORAGE PORT
NUMBER/ALIAS
MANDATORY
-id
12
ID
PSCSI ID NUMBER
BETWEEN 0 AND 15
MANDATORY
Example
pscsi set busid if pscsi3 –id 12
snmp manager show
This command displays the managers of the V Switch.
snmp manager show
Table 36:
V Switch SNMP Managers
IP Address
Port
Read
Community Community
Public Private
Write
Trap
yes
212.199.43.96
162
snmp manager add
This command adds a manager to the V Switch.
snmp manager add
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.96
IP ADDRESS
MANAGER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-p
UPD PORT
PORT TO RECEIVE
TRAPS THROUGH
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 162
-rcom
READ COMMUNITY
COMMUNITY TO
OPTIONAL
GET INFORMATION
DEFAULT:
PUBLIC
204
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-wcom
WRITE COMMUNITY
COMMUNITY TO SET
INFORMATION
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
PRIVATE
-trap
TRAP
TO SEND TRAPS TO
MANAGER
OPTIONAL
Y: SEND
N: DO NOT SEND
DEFAULT: Y
snmp manager set
This command modifies parameters of existing managers.
snmp manager set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.96
IP ADDRESS
MANAGER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-p
150
151
UPD PORT
PORT TO RECEIVE
TRAPS THROUGH
MANDATORY
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
-np
NEW PORT
NEW PORT FOR
RECEIVING TRAPS
-rcom
READ COMMUNITY
COMMUNITY TO
GET INFORMATION
DEFAULT:
PUBLIC
-wcom
-trap
WRITE COMMUNITY
COMMUNITY TO SET
INFORMATION
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
PRIVATE
TRAP
TO SEND TRAPS TO
MANAGER
OPTIONAL
Y: SEND
N: DO NOT SEND
DEFAULT: Y
snmp manager remove
This command removes a manager from the V Switch.
snmp manager remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.96
IP ADDRESS
MANAGER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-p
150
UPD PORT
PORT TO RECEIVE
TRAPS THROUGH
MANDATORY
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ip config show
This command displays the V Switch IP configurations.
ip config show
Table 37:
V Switch IP Configurations
If Name IP Address
Net Mask
Activity
Active
mgmt
eth1
eth1
eth2
eth3
eth3
212.199.43.46
212.199.43.56
212.199.43.57
212.199.75.66
212.199.12.67
212.199.12.70
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
Active
Inactive
Active
Inactive
Active
ip config set
This command configures a new interface alias or edits an existing one.
ip config set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.56
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS
ASSIGNING TO THE
MANDATORY
Executing this
command on the
same network port
with a different IP
address will not reset
the network port
INTERFACE PORT
-if
eth1
INTERFACE ALIAS
OR NAME
NETWORK
MANDATORY
ETH1, ETH2,
ETH3
INTERFACE PORT
address. It will add
another IP address to
the network port
-im
IP MASK
ACTIVITY
IP NET MASK
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
255.255.255.0
-act
1
IF IP ADDRESS IS
ACTIVE TO EXPOSE
VOLUMES. USE
INACTIVE STATUS
TO ALLOW
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 1
(ACTIVE).
2(INACTIVE)
FAILOVER.
Example
ip config set –ip 212.199.43.56 –if eth1 –act 1
ip config remove
This command removes an IP address from an interface.
ip config remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
206
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS TO
REMOVE FROM THE
NETWORK
MANDATORY
INTERFACE PORT
Example
ip config remove –ip 212.199.43.70
ip route add
This command adds an IP route to a network port.
ip route add
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-dip
10.10.20.20
DESTINATION IP
IP OF HOST
STATION
MANDATORY
-dmask
-gw
255.255.255.0
30.30.20.20
DESTINATION
MASK
IP MASK OF HOST
STATION
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
THE GATEWAY
ROUTER
-if
eth2
INTERFACE
ALIAS
NETWORK PORT TO
OPEN
MANDATORY
COMMUNICATION
THROUGH
Example:
An IP routing path to Network D, IP 10.10.20.20, (IP mask 255.255.255.0) is
mapped from network port Eth2 through router gateway 30.30.20.20.
ip route add –dip 10.10.20.20 –dmask 255.255.255.0 –gw
30.30.20.20 –if eth2
ip route show
This command shows all IP routes on a V Switch.
ip route show
Dest IP
Address
Dest Mask
Interface Gateway
10.10.20.20
10.12.40.40
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
Eth2
Eth3
30.30.20.20
20.22.11.11
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ip route remove
This command removes an IP route from a network port.
ip route remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-dip
10.12.40.40
DESTINATION IP
IP OF HOST
STATION
MANDATORY
-dmask
-gw
255.255.255.0
20.22.11.11
DESTINATION
MASK
IP MASK OF HOST
STATION
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
GATEWAY
GATEWAY TO HOST
STATION IP
ADDRESS
-if
eth3
INTERFACE
ALIAS
NETWORK PORT TO
OPEN
MANDATORY
COMMUNICATION
THROUGH
Example:
The routing path to destination network IP 10.12.40.40 (IP mask
255.255.255.0) is removed from network port Eth3.
ip route remove –dip 10.12.40.40 –dmask 255.255.255.0 -
dmask 20.22.11.11 –if eth3
ip isns show
This command shows all iSNS servers configured on the V-Switch.
ip isns show
Table 38:
iSNS Servers
212.199.43.2
212.199.56.134
ip isns add
This command adds an iSNS server’s IP address to the V-Switch iSNS client.
ip isns add
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.1
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
ISNS SERVER
MANDATORY
208
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ip isns remove
This command removes an iSNS server’s IP address from the V-Switch iSNS
client.
ip isns remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.1
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
ISNS SERVER
MANDATORY
neighbor add
This command adds a neighbor to a cluster.
neighbor add
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
VSwitch2
NEIGHBOR
ALIAS OF NEIGHBOR
TO ADD TO
MANDATORY
CLUSTER
-ip
212.199.43.75
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
MGMT PORT ON
NEIGHBOR
MANDATORY
Example
neighbor add –nb VSwitch2 –ip 212.199.43.75
neighbor set
This command resets a neighbor alias or IP address in a cluster.
neighbor set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
VSwitch2
NEIGHBOR
ALIAS OF NEIGHBOR
TO ADD TO
MANDATORY
CLUSTER
-ip
212.199.43.75
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
MGMT PORT ON
NEIGHBOR
MANDATORY
neighbor show
This command lists the neighbor(s) in a cluster.
neighbor show
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 39:
Neighbors in a Cluster
IP Address UDP SNMP Timeout SNMP # of
Name
(msec)
Retries
VSwitch2 212.199.43.75 161 1500
3
neighbor details
This command lists the details of a neighbor in a cluster.
neighbor details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
VSwitch2
NEIGHBOR
ALIAS OF NEIGHBOR
IN CLUSTER
MANDATORY
Table 40:
Neighbor Details
Neighbor Name
IP Address
VSwitch2
212.199.43.75
Last Received Keep Alive:
Status
3
Alive
srOpen
Lock Status
neighbor remove
This command removes a V Switch from a cluster.
neighbor remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-nb
VSwitch2
NEIGHBOR
ALIAS OF NEIGHBOR
TO ADD TO
MANDATORY
CLUSTER
cluster show
This command shows the keep alive parameters of a cluster.
cluster show
Table 41:
Cluster Table
Last Keep Alive:
KeepAlive Int(s):
Susp Int(s):
1
2
6
210
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Last Keep Alive:
Dead Int(s):
Failover:
1
10
Enabled
Running
State:
cluster set
This command allows you to modify a cluster’s parameters.
cluster set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-kai
5
KEEP ALIVE
INTERVAL
TIME BETWEEN
ALIVE SIGNALS
FROM NEIGHBORS
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
-sint
-fint
10
20
SUSPICIOUS
INTERVAL
TIME FROM WHEN A
SIGNAL WAS
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
EXPECTED BUT NOT
RECEIVED
FAILOVER INTERVAL
TIME WHEN
SUSPICIOUS
INTERVAL IS
EXCEEDED
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
Example:
The Keep Alive interval is set to 5 seconds. That is, every 5 seconds an alive
signal is sent out to all neighboring V Switches. The neighboring V
Switches register a suspicious interval after 10 seconds without an alive
signal. This is the equivalent of 2 missed keep alive intervals. After a total
of 20 seconds, from the first missed alive signal, the neighboring V Switches
register a dead interval. This is the equivalent of 4 missed keep alive
intervals.
cluster set –kai 5 –sint 10 –dint 20
cluster failover enable
This command enables the cluster failover functionality. This command
must be executed on both V Switches in the cluster.
cluster failover enable
cluster failover disable
This command disables the cluster failover functionality. This command
must be executed on both V Switches in the cluster.
cluster failover disable
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ft show
This command displays the configuration for file transfer.
ft show
Table 42:
File Transfer Configuration
Host IP:
212.199.43.46
File Name:
File Type:
Time Out
/usr/VSwitch/images/im1234.run
af
15
Number of Retries
Command
3
download
Transferring
ok
Status
Error
ft upload software
This command uploads a V Switch database file from the V Switch to the
local TFTP server.
ft upload software
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
SERVER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-fn
-ft
Backupdata
db
FILE NAME
FILE TYPE
NAME TO SAVE FILE
AS
MANDATORY
FORMAT TO SAVE
DATA IN
OPTIONAL
DB – DATA BASE
DEFAULT: DB
ft download
This command downloads a V Switch database configuration file from the
local TFTP server.
ft download
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
TELNET STATION
WHERE TFTP
MANDATORY
APPLICATION SITS
-fn
Backupdata
FILE NAME
NAME TO SAVE FILE
AS
MANDATORY
212
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ft
db
FILE TYPE
FORMAT TO SAVE
DATA IN
OPTIONAL
DB – DATA BASE
-tmo
-nor
15
3
TIME BEFORE
TIMEOUT
NUMBER OF
SECONDS BEFORE
TIMEOUT
OPTIONAL
5 –3600 SEC
NUMBER OF
RETRIES
NUMBER OF
RETRIES TO
CONNECT
OPTIONAL
0 – 10
ft export problem
This command exports three files: configuration file, last good database
and the corrupted database file for examination.
You can only export after the V Switch reboots in safe mode.
ft export problem
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
SERVER IP
ADDRESS
MANDATORY
-fd
Backupdata
FILE DIRECTORY
DIRECTORY TO
MANDATORY
EXPORT FILES TO
system boot
This command forces the V Switch to boot in Safe Mode.
system boot
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-sm
1
SAFE MODE
SAFE MODE LEVEL
MANDATORY
0:NORMAL
1: LAST GOOD
CONFIGURATION
2: DEFAULT
DATABASE
3: DEFAULT
FACTORY
SYSTEM
system set
This command sets or unsets the system to work in database replication
mode.
system set
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-rep
yes
REPLICATE
REPLICATION OF
THE DATABASE
MANDATORY
YES: REPLICATE
NO: DO NOT
REPLICATE
system copy
This command copies the database from either the flash or compact flash to
either the compact flash or flash.
system copy
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-from
cflash
FROM
WHERE TO COPY
FROM
MANDATORY
FLASH
CFLASH
-type
db
TYPE
TYPE OF FILE TO
COPY
MANDATORY
DB: DATABASE
system show
This command shows the status of both the compact flash and replication
mode.
system show
Flash
present
Compact Flash
Database Configuration
Database Current
present
replicate
replicate
214
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volume Configuration
These commands enable you to configure and view disks and volumes via
the V Switch.
COMMAND
COMMAND
STORAGE DISCOVERY
STORAGE BLINK ACTIVATE
STORAGE BLINK ABORT
STORAGE SHOW
VOLUME CREATE MIRROR
VOLUME CREATE CONCATENATED
VOLUME CREATE STRIPED
VOLUME SET
STORAGE DISK SHOW
STORAGE DISK SET
STORAGE ALIAS
VOLUME REMOVE
VOLUME REMOVE -ALL
VOLUME REPLACE
STORAGE DETAILS
STORAGE SET
VOLUME MIRROR SHOW
VOLUME MIRROR SYNC
VOLUME MIRROR DUMMYSYNC
VOLUME COPY CREATE
VOLUME COPY SHOW
VOLUME COPY ABORT
VOLUME MIRROR ADD
VOLUME MIRROR BREAK
VOLUME RESIZE
STORAGE REMOVE
SUBDISK CREATE
SUBDISK SHOW
SUBDISK DETAILS
SUBDISK ALIAS
SUBDISK SET
SUBDISK REMOVE
VOLUME SHOW
VOLUME RETRACT
VOLUME DETAILS
VOLUME ALIAS
VOLUME EXPAND
VOLUME CREATE SNAPSHOT
VOLUME SNAPSHOT SHOW
VOLUME SNAPSHOT LIST
VOLUME HIERARCHY
VOLUME CREATE SIMPLE
VOLUME CREATE TRANSPARENT
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
storage discovery
This command resets the Fiber Channel loop and reregisters all attached
storage devices. This command is used after adding or removing storage
devices from the V Switch topography. Because this command resets the
FC loop, it will cause a failure of any I/O operations being executed when
the command is invoked.
storage discovery
storage blink activate
This command allows you to blink a storage device to identify it.
storage blink activate
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Stor_1
STORAGE DEVICE
ALAIS OF DEVICE
TO BLINK
MANDATORY
-t
120
TIME
LENGTH OF TIME TO
BLINK DEVICE
MANDATORY
1-3600 SEC
0=FOREVER
storage blink abort
This command stops a storage device from blinking.
storage blink abort
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Stor_1
STORAGE DEVICE
ALAIS OF DEVICE
TO BLINK
MANDATORY
storage show
This command shows all storage devices connected to the V Switch.
storage show
Table 43:
Storage Devices
Alias
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Type
Stor_1 0102030405060708
Stor_2 090a0b0c0d0e0f10
Stor_3 090a0b0c0d0e0f10
0 Disabled
0 Enabled
1 Enabled
disk
entire
split
216
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alias
disk4
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Type
0102030405060708
0 Storage is
missing
entire
storage disk show
This command shows all storage disks connected to the V Switch.
storage disk show
Table 44:
Storage Disks
Alias
disk1
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Subdisk
01:02:03:04:05:06
:07:08
0 Disabled
0 Enabled
1 Enabled
entire
entire
split
disk2
disk3
disk4
09:0a:0b:0c:0d:0e
:0f:10
09:0a:0b:0c:0d:0e
:0f:10
01:02:03:04:05:06
:07:08
0 Storage is
missing
entire
storage disk set
This command allows you to enable or disable write cache for a disk.
storage disk set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-d
Disk2JBOD5
DISK
DISK DEVICE
MANDATORY
-wce
yes
WRITE CACHE
ENABLED
WRITE CACHE
FUNCTION
MANDATORY
YES OR NO
storage alias
This command allows you to view all storage aliases in full. The command
storage showhas a ten-character display limit so storage aliases may be
ambiguous in the storage show table.
storage alias
Table 45:
Storage Aliases
Entity Name
LUN
000
000
Alias
2000002037d8e314
2000002037f8ba50
Stor_1
Stor_2
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
storage details
This command shows all storage devices attached to the V Switch.
storage details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
disk1
STORAGE ALIAS
ALIAS OF STORAGE
TO VIEW
MANDATORY
Table 46:
Storage Details
Alias:
Disk2JBOD5
2000002037a9551e
LUN(Logical Unit Number) 0000000000000000
Entity Name:
Vendor Name:
SEAGATE
Additional Info:
Transport type:
Oper. Status:
Fiber Channel
Enabled
Time since last Update:
8 days 3h:12m:16 sec 37
(1/60 Sec)
SCSI Version:
Revision Level:
Product Id:
3
0002ST336704FC
ST336704FC
Serial Number:
Number Of Blocks:
Block Size:
3CD0FHA400002108XYGLXYGL
71687369
512
SubDisks:
Entire
true
Write Cache Enabled:
Write Protected
Volume
false
sim
storage set
This command allows you to edit storage device parameters.
storage set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Stor_7
STORAGE ALIAS
STORAGE ALIAS TO
MODIFY
MANDATORY
-na
disk7
NEW ALIAS
NEW ALIAS FOR
STORAGE
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
-info
replace_disk2
INFORMATION
INFORMATION ON
STORAGE TO SET
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
218
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
storage remove
This command removes a storage device from the database only if the
storage device state is defined as StorageIsMissing.
storage remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-s
Stor_1
STORAGE
ALIAS OF STORAGE
TO REMOVE
MANDATORY
subdisk create
This command creates a subdisk according to the input parameters.
subdisk create
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-d
Disk 1
DISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF DISK IN
WHICH TO CREATE
THE SUBDISK
MANDATORY
-sl
-sa
-sd
18000000
0
SUBDISK LENGTH
START ADDRESS
SUBDISK ALIAS
LENGTH IN
BLOCKS OF
SUBDISK
MANDATORY
BLOCK ADDRESS TO
BEGIN CREATING
SUBDISK FROM
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 0
Subdisk 1
ALIAS FOR NEW
SUBDISK
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT
FORMAT: DEF_
SPLIT_CLUSTER
NO._DISK NO._
END ADDRESS
subdisk show
This command shows all/specified subdisks connected to the V Switch.
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
subdisk show
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DISK ALIAS
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-d
ALIAS OF DISK TO
SHOW SUBDISKS
FROM
OPTIONAL
USE THIS
SWITCH TO LIST
ONLY THE
DETAILS OF A
SPECIFIC DISK
Table 47:
Details of all Subdisks
Disk
Subdisk
split1
split2
split1
split2
Start Address
Length Vol
disk1
disk1
disk2
disk2
disk3
disk3
0
512
yes
yes
no
512
0
512
2048
512
2048
yes
no
split1di*~0
split2 1024
1024
1024
no
subdisk details
This command shows all/specified subdisks on a disk.
subdisks details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-d
disk1
DISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF DISK TO
MANDATORY
SHOW SUBDISKS ON
-sd
SUBDISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF SUBDISK
TO SHOW
OPTIONAL
Table 48:
Details of a Specified Subdisk
Subdisk Start Length Allocatedvolume DetailsLast
Address Update
split1 0
512
512
yes
yes
vsplit2""
split 3""
11/11/01
12:30
split2 512
11/11/01
12:30
subdisk alias
This command allows you to view all subdisk aliases in full. The command
subdisk showhas a ten-character display limit so subdisk aliases may be
ambiguous in the subdisk show table.
220
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
subdisk alias
Table 49:
Subdisk Aliases
Disk
Length
1024
Alias
Disk3
Disk7
Disk7
split1disk3
split1disk7
split2mirror
1024
1024
subdisk set
This command renames a subdisk and allows you to edit the subdisk
information.
subdisk set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-sd
sub1
SUBDISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF SUBDISK
TO RENAME
MANDATORY
-na
mir1
NEW SUBDISK ALIAS
INFORMATION
NEW ALIAS OF
SUBDISK
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING THE
ALIAS
-info
INFORMATION ON
SUBDISK FOR LOCAL
ADMINISTRATION
ONLY
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
subdisk remove
This command removes a specified subdisk.
subdisk remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-sd
sub1
SUBDISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF SUBDISK
TO DELETE
MANDATORY
volume show
This command shows all volumes defined in the database.
volume show
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 50:
Volume Details of all Volumes
Alias
Type Act # of Bl Pot # of Bl Bl Size State
Simple1 Simple 17999999
RLU1 Simple 17999999
Mir1 Mirror 8388608
RLU3 Simple 16777216
17999999
17999999
8388608
512 Internal
512 Exposed
512 Exposed
512 Internal
16777216
volume details
This command shows all details of a specified volume.
volume details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
stripe1
VOLUME
ALIAS OF SINGLE
VOLUME DETAILS
TO SHOW
MANDATORY
Table 51:
Specific Volume Details
Alias
Snp3Stripe1
stripe
41943040
25 GB
Type
Number of Blocks
Actual Size
Potential Size
Block Size
State
50 GB
512
internal
200
Stripe Size
Snapshot of
Created
Stripe1
Mon. 15 Dec. 2003 01:13
Threshold
80%
Percentage Utilized
# of SubVolumes
Parent
90%
-
RAID
Time Since Last Reset
Child
1 days 4h:14m:21s
vol1
222
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alias
Child
Snp3Stripe1
vol2
volume alias
This command allows you to view all volume aliases in full. The command
volume showhas a ten-character display limit so volume aliases may be
ambiguous in the volume show table.
volume alias
Table 52:
Volume Aliases
Volume Type
striped
Alias
MusicBoxTop40
Entertainment
Oct02PayRoll
concat
mirrored
volume hierarchy
This command shows the volumes composing the specified volume.
volume hierarchy
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
stripe1
VOLUME
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO DISPLAY
MANDATORY
Table 53:
Volume Hierarchy
Alias
Type
#SubVolume
Parent
RAID
State
stripe1 striped
2
0
0
internal
vol1
vol2
simple
simple
stripe1
stripe1
internal
internal
volume create simple
This command creates a simple volume out of a disk or subdisk.
volume create simple
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
VOLUME
ALIAS OF SIMPLE
VOLUME
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
(SUB)DISK ALIAS
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-sd
SUBDISK ALIAS
ALIAS OF SUBDISK
TO USE
MANDATORY IF
USING A
SUBDISK
-d
DISK
ALIAS OF DISK TO
USE
MANDATORY IF
USING A DISK
volume create transparent
This command creates a transparent volume out of a disk.
volume create transparent
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
trans1
VOLUME
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO CREATE
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: DISK
ALIAS
-d
Stor_3
DISK
ALIAS OF DISK TO
USE
MANDATORY
volume create mirror
This command creates a mirrored volume the specified number of volumes.
volume create mirror
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mirror2
VOLUME
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO CREATE
MANDATORY
-nbc
-ch
2
NUMBER OF
CHILDREN
NUMBER OF
VOLUMES IN
MIRROR
OPTIONAL
FROM 2 TO 4
DEFAULT: 2
Simple1
CHILD
CHILD
ALIAS OF EACH
VOLUME TO
INCLUDE IN
MIRROR
MANDATORY
-ch
Simple2
ALIAS OF EACH
VOLUME TO
INCLUDE IN
MIRROR
MANDATORY
volume create concatenated
This command creates a concatenated volume across the specified volumes
in the order listed.
volume create concatenated
224
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Concat1
VOLUME
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO CREATE
MANDATORY
-nbc
-ch
2
NUMBER OF
CHILDREN
NUMBER OF
VOLUMES TO
CONCATENATE
ACROSS
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 2
Simple1
CHILD
CHILD
ALIAS OF EACH
VOLUME TO
INCLUDE IN
CONCATENATED
VOLUME
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
-ch
Simple2
ALIAS OF EACH
VOLUME TO
INCLUDE IN
CONCATENATED
VOLUME
volume create striped
This command creates a striped volume across the specified volumes in the
order listed.
volume create striped
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Stripe1
VOLUME
ALIAS OF VOLUME
MANDATORY
-sus
-nbc
200
2
STRIPED UNIT SIZE
NUMBER OF BLOCKS
TO WRITE IN EACH
VOLUME PER PASS
MANDATORY
NUMBER OF
CHILDREN
NUMBER OF
VOLUMES TO
CREATE STRIPE
ACROSS
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 2
-ch
-ch
Simple3
Simple4
CHILD
CHILD
ALIAS OF EACH
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
VOLUME IN STRIPE
ALIAS OF EACH
VOLUME TO
INCLUDE IN
MIRROR
volume set
This command will change a volume alias or load threshold.
volume set
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Subdisk7
VOLUME
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO CHANGE
MANDATORY
-na
-lt
Simple7
70
NEW ALIAS
NEW ALIAS FOR
VOLUME
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING ALIAS
LOAD THRESHOLD
PERCENTAGE FULL
AT DESTINATION
TO TRIGGER AN
ALARM
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING LOAD
THRESHOLD
volume remove
This command removes a volume from the system. The volume must be at
the top of the hierarchy. The volume cannot be exposed; the volume LU
must be inactivated.
volume remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Stripe3
VOLUME
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO REMOVE
MANDATORY
volume remove -all
This command removes a volume and all volumes composing it in the
hierarchy. The volume must be at the top of the hierarchy. The volume
cannot be exposed; the volume LU must be inactivated. Simple volumes
will convert back to their component disks or subdisks.
volume remove -all
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Stripe 1
VOLUME ALIAS
ALIAS OF TOP-
LEVEL VOLUME TO
REMOVE
MANDATORY
volume replace
This command replaces a volume with another volume. Use this command
after a disk failure to replace a volume used in a storage hierarchy with a
volume on a functional disk.
If you are replacing a volume used as part of a mirrored volume, use the
CLI command volume mirror-synch to synchronize the replacement
volume with the other mirrored volume(s). See the working example:
“Replacing a Mirrored Volume,” page 256.
226
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume replace
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Simple4
VOLUME
VOLUME ON FAILED
DISK
MANDATORY
-nvol
Simple6
NEW VOLUME
REPLACEMENT
VOLUME
MANDATORY
volume mirror show
This command shows the status of all synchronized mirrored volumes in
the V Switch.
volume mirror show
Volume Alias Source Alias Operational
Status
Progress
Mirror8
Mirror4
Mirror2
Mirror3
Synchronizing
60%
Last sync
succeeded
100%
Mirror 12
Mirror10
none
-
volume mirror sync
This command synchronizes mirrored volumes. Use this command after
adding another volume to a group of mirrored volumes or to restore a
mirrored volume on a disk after a disk failure.
volume mirror sync
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
Mirror2
SOURCE
ALIAS OF SOURCE
VOLUME TO COPY
MANDATORY
-dst
Mirror8
DESTINATION
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO COPY TO
MANDATORY
volume mirror dummysync
This command performs a dummy synchronization on the non-exposing V
Switch in a cluster after the mirrored volumes have been synchronized on
the exposing V Switch.
volume mirror dummysync
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
Mirror2
SOURCE
ALIAS OF SOURCE
VOLUME TO COPY
MANDATORY
-dst
Mirror8
DESTINATION
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO COPY TO
MANDATORY
volume copy create
This command creates an off-line volume copy.
volume copy create
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
ScienceLab
SOURCE
ALIAS OF SOURCE
VOLUME TO COPY
MANDATORY
-dst
ScienceLabII
DESTINATION
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO COPY TO
MANDATORY
volume copy show
This command shows all on-going and previously executed operations on
volumes
volume copy show
Volume Alias Source Alias Operational
Status
Progress
Mirror8
Mirror4
Mirror2
Mirror3
Synchronizing
60%
Last sync
succeeded
100%
volume copy abort
This command aborts an off-line volume copy operation.
volume copy abort
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
ScienceLab
SOURCE
ALIAS OF SOURCE
VOLUME TO COPY
MANDATORY
-dst
ScienceLabII
DESTINATION
ALIAS OF VOLUME
MANDATORY
TO ABORT COPY TO
228
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume mirror add
This command adds an on-line volume copy to a mirror or the head of a
hierarchy.
volume mirror add
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mirror5
VOLUME
SOURCE VOLUME
MANDATORY
TO ADD MIRROR TO
-ch
Simple10
Mirror5a
-nosync
CHILD
NEW CHILD TO ADD
TO MIRROR
MANDATORY
OPTIONAL
-dst
DESTINATION
ALIAS OF NEW
MIRROR
-no
NO
DISABLE
OPTIONAL
SYNCHRONIZATION
AUTOMATIC
MIRROR SYNC
NO SYNCIF USED
sync
volume mirror break
This command removes a child from a mirror volume.
volume mirror break
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mirror5
VOLUME
VOLUME MIRROR IS
ADDING TO
MANDATORY
-ch
Simple10
CHILD
CHJILD TO BREAK
FROM MIRROR
MANDATORY
volume resize
This command increases a volume’s potential capacity on-line.
volume resize
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
SOURCE
VOLUME TO RESIZE
MANDATORY
-dst
DESTINATION
ALIAS OF RESIZED
VOLUME
OPTIONAL
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-with
SIMPLE VOLUME
VOLUME TO RESIZE
WITH
MANDATORY
volume retract
This command retracts a volume by deleting all added volumes use to
resize the volume. This command only works if the resized volume has not
been expanded. The head of the volume hierarchy is retracted, not the
resized volume.
volume retract
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mir5
VOLUME
VOLUME TO
MANDATORY
RETRACT – HEAD
OF HIERARCHY
volume expand
This command expands a volume’s actual capacity to match its potential
capacity.
volume expand
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Simple3
VOLUME
VOLUME TO EXPAND
MANDATORY
volume create snapshot
This command creates a snapshot
volume create snapshot
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-src
Mirror3
SOURCE
SOURCE OF
SNAPSHOT
MANDATORY
-dst
-lt
Snp1Mir3
50
DESTINATION
SNAPSHOT
MANDATORY
DESTINATION
LOAD THRESHOLD
PERCENTAGE FULL
AT DESTINATION
TO TRIGGER AN
ALARM
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 80%
230
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume snapshot show
This command shows all source volumes and their snapshot volumes.
volume snapshot show
Source
Snapshot
Snp1Mir3
Snp7Mir2
Date & Time
Utilization
60%
Mirror3
Mirror2
11/01/04 8:34:28
09/01/04 15:53:07 100%
volume snapshot list
This command shows all snapshot volumes for a specific source volume.
volume snapshot list
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Mirro2
VOLUME
SNAPSHOT SOURCE
VOLUME
MANDATORY
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volume Exposure
These commands enable you to expose volumes using iSCSI protocol to
network hosts and control access the exposed volumes.
COMMAND
COMMAND
ISCSI PORTAL SHOW
ISCSI PORTAL CREATE
ISCSI PORTAL REMOVE
ISCSI TARGET SHOW
ISCSI TARGET CREATE
ISCSI TARGET ALIAS
ISCSI TARGET SET
ISCSI TARGET REMOVE
ISCSI TARGET AUTHENTICATION
ACL SHOW
ACL IDENTITY ADD NAME
ACL IDENTITY REMOVE NAME
ACL IDENTITY ADD CHAP
ACL IDENTITY REMOVE CHAP
ACL IDENTITY ADD SRP
ACL IDENTITY REMOVE SRP
ACL IDENTITY SET
ACL UP
ACL DOWN
IP RADIUS SHOW
IP RADIUS ADD
ACL DETAILS
ACL ADD
IP RADIUS SET
ACL SET
IP RADIUS REMOVE
VOLUME EXPOSE –NEW
VOLUME EXPOSE
ACL REM
ACL IDENTITY SHOW
ACL IDENTITY DETAILS
ACL IDENTITY CREATE
ACL IDENTITY DELETE
LU SHOW
LU DETAILS
LU REMOVE
232
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iscsi portal show
This command shows the portals defined for iSCSI on the V Switch with
which you are communicating.
iscsi portal show
Table 54:
iSCSI Portals
Protocol
Address Type Address
Port
5003
5003
6
6
IPv4
IPv4
172.17.200.156
172.17.200.150
iscsi portal create
This command creates an iSCSI portal on a 1 Gb (network) port.
iscsi portal create
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
NETWORK PORT
MANDATORY
-p
5003
TCP PORT
TCP PORT FOR
ISCSI
COMMUNICATION
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
3260
iscsi portal remove
This command removes an iSCSI portal on a 1 Gb (network) port.
iscsi portal remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.70
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
NETWORK PORT
MANDATORY
-p
5003
TCP PORT
TCP PORT FOR
ISCSI
COMMUNICATION
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
3260
iscsi target show
This command shows all created targets.
iscsi target show
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 55:
iSCSI Targets
Target Alias Target Name
# of LU
Exposed On:
VSwitch1
VSwitch2
VSwitch1
VSwitch2
VSwitch2
wind
wwui
wwui
wwui
wwui
wwui
1
2
1
1
1
fire
water
Presiden*~
Presiden*~
iscsi target create
This command creates an iSCSI target without creating LU0, attaching
volumes or exposing the target. Targets can be created in advance and only
later have LUNs created and exposed.
iscsi target create
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
Finance
TARGET ALIAS
USER-ASSIGNED
ALIAS FOR ISCSI
TARGET
MANDATORY
–tn
billing.san
rad
TARGET WWUI
DEVICE
USER-ASSIGNED
WORLD-WIDE
UNIQUE IDENTIFIER
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
FOR THE TARGET
–device
VSwitch1
ALIAS OF V
SWITCH TO EXPOSE
TAREGT ON
iscsi target alias
This command allows you to view all subdisk aliases in full. The command
iscsi target showhas a ten-character display limit so iscsi target
aliases may be ambiguous in the iscsi target show table.
iscsi target alias
Table 56:
iSCSI Target Aliases
Target Name
wwui
Target Alias
PresidentPersonal
PresidentPublic
BillingRecords
wwui
wwui
iscsi target set
This command renames a target alias.
234
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iscsi target set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
Pilote
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF TARGET
TO RENAME
MANDATORY
-n
Buffy
NEW ALIAS
NEW ALIAS FOR
TARGET
MANDATORY
iscsi target remove
This command removes an iSCSI target.
iscsi target remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
MusicBox
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF ISCSI
TARGET TO REMOVE
MANDATORY
iscsi target authentication
This command allows the assigning of a password to a target to allow
CHAP authentication at initiator connection to the target.
iscsi target authentication
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
MusicBox
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF ISCSI
TARGET TO REMOVE
MANDATORY
-pw
-un
PASSWORD
USER NAME
PASSWORD OF
TARGET
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
SANRADSANRAD
USER NAME OF
TARGET
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT:
SANRAD
acl show
This command shows all target access per identity for the V Switch.
acl show
Table 57:
Target
Target Access per Identity
Position
0
Identity
DEF_ALL
Access
Finance
not-accessible
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Target
Finance
Finance
SQL
Position
Identity
Identity5
Identity2
DEF_ALL
Access
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
read-only
read-write
not-accessible
read-write
not-accessible
read-only
SQL
Identity7
DEF_ALL
Library
Library
Library
Identity4
Identity7
read-write
acl details
This command shows the access control for a target.
acl details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
disk1
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF ISCSI
TARGET
MANDATORY
Table 58:
Target
disk1
Access Control per Target
Position
Identity
Identity5
Access
1
2
3
read-only
read-only
read-write
disk1
Identity3
Identity1
disk1
acl add
This command links an identity and a target.
acl add
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
water
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF ISCSI
TARGET
MANDATORY
-id
health_club
rw
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-acc
ACCESS RIGHTS
ACCESS RIGHTS TO
THE TARGET
OPTIONAL
OPTIONS: RW,
RO OR NA
DEFAULT: RW
236
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-pos
1
POSITION
ACCESS PRIORITY
LEVEL
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 1
acl set
This command changes the access rights of an existing identity as it is
linked with a specific target.
acl set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
water
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF ISCSI
TARGET
MANDATORY
-id
health_club
ro
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-acc
ACCESS RIGHTS
ACCESS RIGHTS TO
THE TARGET
OPTIONAL
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
-pos
3
POSITION
ACCESS PRIORITY
LEVEL
OPTIONAL
MANDATORY IF
CHANGING
acl rem
This command removes an identity from the access control list of a specific
target.
acl rem
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
water
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF ISCSI
TARGET
MANDATORY
-id
health_club
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
acl identity show
This command lists the identities in a V Switch.
acl identity show
Table 59:
iSCSI Initiators in an Identity
Definition
Alias
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alias
Definition
health_club
library_staff
members
all library employees
acl identity details
This command lists the details of a specific identity.
acl identity details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Library
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
Table 60:
Identity Details
Description:
Initiators:
All library employees
iqn.com.ibm.Chandler
iqn.com.cisco.Nigel
iqn.com.ibm.Helen
iqn.com.cisco.Julia
CHAP
Credentials:
acl identity create
This command creates a new identity for the V Switch.
acl identity create
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-info
All_
registered_
students
INFORMATION
INFORMATION ON
IDENTITY
OPTIONAL
acl identity delete
This command deletes an identity from the V Switch.
acl identity delete
238
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
acl identity add name
This command adds an iSCSI initiator to an identity.
acl identity add name
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-name
iqn.com.ibm.
Sarah
INITIATOR NAME
WWUI OF
MANDATORY
INITIATOR
acl identity remove name
This command removes an iSCSI initiator from an identity.
acl identity remove name
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-name
iqn.com.ibm.
Buffy
INITIATOR NAME
WWUI OF
MANDATORY
INITIATOR
acl identity add chap
This command adds CHAP authentication credentials to an identity.
acl identity add chap
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-un
Sarah
USER NAME
HOST NAME
MANDATORY
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-pw
scalpelblades
USER PASSWORD
HOST PASSWORD
MANDATORY
WITHOUT
RADIUS
12 – 16
PRINTABLE
CHARACTERS
OPTIONAL WITH
RADIUS
-radius
no
RADIUS
SERVER
USE RADIUS
SERVER
OPTIONAL
YES OR NO
DEFAULT: NO
acl identity remove chap
This command removes a CHAP authentication credential from an identity.
acl identity remove chap
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-un
Sarah
USER NAME
HOST NAME
MANDATORY
acl identity add srp
This command adds SRP authentication credentials to an identity.
acl identity add srp
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-un
-pw
Robert
USER NAME
HOST NAME
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
cardiac
USER PASSWORD
HOST PASSWORD
acl identity remove srp
This command removes an SRP authentication credential from an identity.
acl identity remove srp
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
240
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-un
Robert
USER NAME
HOST NAME
MANDATORY
acl identity set
This command allows changes to an identity.
acl identity set
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-id
Med_School
IDENTITY
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
-na
Medschool
all_students
yes
NEW ALAIS
NEW ALAIS FOR
IDENTITY
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
-info
-radius
INFORMATION
INFORMATION ON
IDENTITY
RADIUS
SERVER
RADIUS
AUTHENTICATION
OPTIONAL
YES OR NO
USED
acl up
This command pushes an identity position up in priority.
acl up
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
sql
TARGET
TARGET ALAIS
MANDATORY
-id
-n
Med_School
IDENTITY
JUMP SIZE
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
NUMBER OF PLACES
TO MOVE UP
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 1
acl down
This command pushes an identity position down in priority.
acl down
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
sql
TARGET
TARGET ALAIS
MANDATORY
-id
-n
Med_School
2
IDENTITY
JUMP SIZE
NAME OF ACL
MANDATORY
NUMBER OF PLACES
TO MOVE DOWN
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: 1
ip radius show
This command shows all IP addresses for RADIUS servers configured on
the V Switch RADIUS client.
Table 61:
RADIUS Server IP Addresses
212.199.43.2
212.199.56.134
ip radius add
This command adds a RADIUS server IP address to the V Switch RADIUS
client.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.2
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
RADIUS SERVER
MANDATORY
-p
24562
PORT
KEY
PORT NUMBER
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
-key
DataMakesMeHot
SHARED SECRET
BETWEEN V-
SWITCH AND
RADIUS SERVER
ip radius set
This command allows changes to a RADIUS server configuration on the V
Switch RADIUS client.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.2
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
RADIUS SERVER
MANDATORY
-p
PORT
PORT NUMBER
OPTIONAL
242
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-key
Xqjz1m7s9rjb
KEY
SHARED SECRET
BETWEEN V-
OPTIONAL
SWITCH AND
RADIUS SERV
ip radius remove
This command removes a RADIUS server IP address from the V Switch
RADIUS client.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ip
212.199.43.2
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS OF
RADIUS SERVER
MANDATORY
-p
PORT
PORT NUMBER
OPTIONAL
volume expose –new
This command creates a new LU0 and a new target for a specified volume.
volume expose -new
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Concat 1
VOLUME ALIAS
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO CREATE LU0
AND TARGET FOR
MANDATORY
-ta
-tn
MusicBox
TARGET ALIAS
TARGET WWUI
USER-ASSIGNED
ALIAS OF TARGET
TO CREATE
MANDATORY
ALIAS CANNOT
CONTAIN SPACES
Ourcompany.
com/SAN/
MusicBox
USER-ASSIGNED
WORLD WIDE
MANDATORY
UNIQUE IDENTIFIER
FOR THE TARGET
-device
V Switch 1
DEVICE
ALIAS OF V
SWITCH TO EXPOSE
MANDATORY
TARGET ON
volume expose
This command creates a new LU0 for a specified volume and exposes it on
an existing target.
volume expose
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-vol
Stripe1
VOLUME
ALIAS OF VOLUME
TO CREATE LU0
AND TARGET FOR
MANDATORY
-ta
music.sanrad
0
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF NEW
MANDATORY
MANDATORY
TARGET TO CREATE
-lun
LOGICAL UNIT
NUMBER
NUMBER TO ASSIGN
TO VOLUME FOR
EXPOSURE
-p
iscsi
PROTOCOL
EXPOSING
PROTOCOL
OPTIONAL
DEFAULT: ISCSI
lu show
This command shows all LUNs defined in the database.
lu show
Table 62:
Details of all LUNs
LUN
0
Tgt Alias Volume
Oper Status
Active
Pilote
Spirou
Pilote
1
xxx
yyy
Mir1
zzz
0
Active
1
Active
0
Active
lu details
This command shows the details of an LU in the database.
244
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
lu details
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
Spirou
TARGET
ALIAS OF TARGET
OF LUN
MANDATORY
-lun
1
LOGICAL UNIT
NUMBER
LUN TO SHOW
MANDATORY
Example:
lu details –ta Spirou –lun 1
Table 63: LUN Details
Target Alias
Target Type
LUN
Spirou
iSCSI
1
Volume
Mir1
Status
active
Virtual Last Reset
3 days:12 h: 7m: 2sec
lu remove
This command removes the LU from its target. The LU must be inactive
before being removed. This command is the opposite of volume
expose.
If you remove LU0
you will disable the
associated target
even if the target has
other attached LUs lu remove
SWITCH
PARAMETER
DEFINITION
STATUS
EXAMPLE
-ta
Pilote
TARGET ALIAS
ALIAS OF TARGET
TO REMOVE LU
FROM
MANDATORY
-lun
0
LOGICAL UNIT
NUMBER
LU TO REMOVE
FROM THE TARGET
MANDATORY
Chapter 11: Command Line Interface
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Notes
246
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r
A
Sample Configurations
This chapter details working examples of how to install, configure
and use the V-Switch with a Microsoft iSCSI initiator on a
Windows™ 2000 platform for:
IN THIS
CHAPTER
SAMPLE
INTRODUCTION
ꢀ
Basic V-Switch configuration with volume creation and
exposure.
INSTALLING AND
USING THE V-SWITCH
3000
ꢀ
Individual disk replacement and mirrored volume
reconstitution.
REPLACING A
MIRRORED VOLUME
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Off-line data replication.
REPLICATING DATA
OFF-LINE
IP routing path configuration.
Basic cluster configuration.
CONFIGURING THE V-
SWITCH WITH A
SINGLE IP ROUTING
PATH
CONFIGURING A
CLUSTER
Sample Configurations
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Introduction
This chapter provides working examples of standard procedures and
configurations you will use in owning and operating your V-Switch.
Each example uses one basic storage network consisting of:
ꢁ
One JBOD appliance with four disks of equal capacity (the actual
capacity is not important) connected to the V-Switch.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
A PC running on the Windows™ 2000 OS platform.
Microsoft iSCSI initiator software installed on each host terminal.
Pre-assigned IP addresses for host and management stations.
248
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing and Using the V-Switch 3000
You have just purchased a V-Switch 3000 and want to begin managing your
company’s small but growing storage network.
So far you have:
ꢁ
One JBOD appliance with four disks of equal capacity (the actual
capacity is not important) connected to the 3000.
ꢁ
One PC acting as both management station for the 3000 and
network host station for the storage network. The management
station function is connected to the 3000 via an RS232 cable. The
network host function is connected to the 3000 via a 1 Gbit
Ethernet RJ45 cable.
ꢁ
An IP address assigned to the management/host station.
In this example, the network port IP address will be assigned 172.17.200.174
and the iSCSI portal for network port Eth1 will be set to 5003.
This example explains how to:
ꢁ
ꢁ
Use one terminal as both a management and host station.
Initialize and manage the 3000 through an RS232 connection and
terminal emulation program.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Create a RAID 10 volume and expose it.
Configure your iSCSI initiator for access to the exposed volume.
Once you have your components organized, you can begin.
STEP 1.
ATTACH CABLES
Attach an HSSDC-DB9 fibre channel cable from your JBOD appliance to one of
the storage ports on the back panel of the V-Switch. See #1, Figure 98, page
250. Depending on your appliance, you need to plug a terminator into one of
the JBOD ports.
Attach the included RS232 cable from your management/host station to the
console port (Console) on the back panel of the V-Switch. See #2, Figure 98,
page 250.
Attach an RJ45 copper 1 Gbit Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port Eth1 on the
front panel of the V-Switch. See #3, Figure 98, page 250.
Your network should mimic Figure 98, page 250.
Sample Configurations
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V Switch
Manager and
Host Station
Windows 2000
Microsoft Initiator
2
Client
RS232
Connection
1 Gbit Ethernet,
RJ45 Copper
Connection
3
Fibre Channel
Connection
1
JBOD 1
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Disk 4
Figure 98.
System Overview
STEP 2.
POWER UP STORAGE DEVICE
Power up the JBOD appliance first to allow the V-Switch to register it in its
network scan.
STEP 3.
POWER UP V-SWITCH
Connect the power cord to the V-Switch and then to the electric socket. Turn
the V-Switch on. The V-Switch powers up. The fan assembly is running and
the LCD panel displays:
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
STEP 4.
CONFIGURE CONSOLE
You are using your PC as both the V-Switch’s management station and the
network host station.
Before you can open a CLI session via the RS232 connection, your console must
be configured to allow communication between the two devices.
250
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open your terminal emulation program and set the system parameters as
follows:
Table 64:
Console Configuration Parameters
PARAMETER
SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
CONFIG SERIAL PORT
BITS PER SECOND
DATA BITS
COM
115200
8
PARITY
NONE
1
STOP BITS
FLOW CONTROL
NONE
STEP 5.
LOGIN TO THE MANAGEMENT PORT
From the open terminal emulation window, press Enter on your keyboard to
open the V-Switch 3000 Login window.
Figure 99.
V-Switch 3000 Login Window
Enter the default user name, sanrad, and password, sanrad, and press Enter
on your keyboard. The CLI prompt > appears. You are now logged in and
ready to begin configuring your V-Switch for volume virtualization and exposure.
STEP 6.
INITIALIZE V-SWITCH
From the open terminal emulation window, use the CLI command initto
name the V-Switch.
init –n VSwitch1
Use the CLI command ip config set to assign an IP address to the
network port Eth 1. Configure the port as active (1) to allow active
communications through the port.
ip config set –ip 172.17.200.174 –if eth1 –im
255.255.255.0 –act 1
Sample Configurations
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 7.
CONFIGURE ISCSI PORTAL
Use the CLI command iscsi portalcreate to configure the iSCSI
portal on network port Eth 1 for iSCSI communications between the V-Switch
and the host station.
The port number you
set in the CLI must
coincide with the port
number you set in
your iSCSI initiator
configuration.
iscsi portal create –ip 172.17.200.174 –p 3260
Use the CLI command iscsi portal show to view the created iSCSI
portal.
iscsi portal show
Table 65:
iSCSI Portal
Protocol
6
Address Type Address
Port
3260
IPv4
172.17.200.174
STEP 8.
CHECK STORAGE DEVICES
Use the CLI command storage showto list the system-registered storage
devices. This ensures that all disks were registered during the disk auto-
discovery scan. This also lists the default disk aliases needed for creating your
simple volumes.
storage show
Table 66:
Storage Devices
Alias
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Type
Stor_1
Stor_2
Stor_3
Stor_4
500507606058c90
0 Enabled
disk
disk
disk
disk
2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
2000002037c32450 0 Enabled
STEP 9.
CREATE SIMPLE VOLUMES
Use the CLI command volume create simpleto create four simple
virtual volumes – one from each physical disk.
volume create simple –vol Simple1 –d Stor_1
volume create simple –vol Simple2 –d Stor_2
volume create simple –vol Simple3 –d Stor_3
volume create simple –vol Simple4 –d Stor_4
STEP 10. CREATE MIRRORED VOLUMES (RAID 1)
Use the CLI command volume create mirrorto create a mirrored
volume, Mirror1, from simple volumes Simple1 and Simple2.
252
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror1 –nbc 2 –ch Simple1 –ch
Simple2
Use the CLI command volume create mirror to create a mirrored
volume, Mirror2, from simple volumes Simple3 and Simple4.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror2 –nbc 2 –ch Simple3 –ch
Simple4
STEP 11. CREATE STRIPED VOLUME (RAID 0)
Use the CLI command volume create striped to create a striped volume,
Stripe1.
volume create striped –vol Stripe1 –nbc 2 –sus 64 –ch
Mirror1 –ch Mirror2
STEP 12. CREATE ISCSI TARGET AND LUN
After creating the final virtual volume configuration that you want to expose to the
network host, you need to create an iSCSI target for the volume as well as attach
LUN0 to the target volume. Use the CLI command volume expose -newto
create the iSCSI target and attach LUN0 to the striped volume, Stripe1.
volume expose -new –vol Stripe1 –ta storage –tn
sanrad.billing. –device VSwitch
STEP 13. CONFIGURE HOST STATION INITIATOR
Open the Microsoft iSCSI initiator program on host station 1.
Sample Configurations
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 100. Microsoft iSCSI Initiator
Click Add from the Target Portals tab. The Add Target Portal dialog box
opens.
Figure 101. Portal Configuration
Enter the IP address of Eth1, 172.17.200.174 and select the socket for the IP
address.
Click OK. The Microsoft initiator automatically discovers all available targets for
this portal (IP + TCP).
Toggle to the Available Targets tab to view all available targets.
254
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 102. Available Target
STEP 14. BEGIN USING VOLUME
You can access Windows’ Disk Management application by right clicking on My
Computer and selecting Manage. Select Disk Management from the
Computer Management window.
The new disk should
be configured as a
basic disk only.
Figure 103. Disk Management Window
Sample Configurations
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing a Mirrored Volume
After configuring the above setup, you notice that Disk 4 in your JBOD has
gone offline. Simulate this by removing a physical disk from the JBOD case.
You must replace the disk with a new one and reconstruct the volume
hierarchy built with the simple volume on Disk 4. Your mirrored volume,
Mirror2; created from simple volumes 3 and 4 on disks 3 and 4 respectively,
will continue to operate while your physical disk is down and you replace
one of its simple volumes.
This example explains how to:
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Identify a failed disk.
Replace a failed disk.
Synchronize a volume to an existing mirrored volume.
Remove a failed volume from the V-Switch database.
Remove a failed disk from the V-Switch database.
256
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V Switch
Manager and
Host Station
Windows 2000
Microsoft Initiator
2
Client
RS232
Connection
1 Gbit Ethernet,
RJ45 Copper
Connection
3
Fibre Channel
Connection
1
JBOD 1
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 5
Disk 3
Disk 4
Figure 104. Replacing a Failed Disk
STEP 1.
SELECT A REPLACEMENT DISK
Insert a replacement blade of the same size according to your specific
manufacture’s instructions
Sample Configurations
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2.
CHECK STORAGE DEVICES
Use the CLI command storage showto view the new disk’s alias. You will
need this alias to create a replacement simple volume. Note that the failed disk
still appears in the table of storage disks.
Table 67:
Storage Devices
Alias
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Subdisk
Stor_1
Stor_2
Stor_3
Stor_4
500507606058c90
0 Enabled
entire
entire
entire
entire
2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
2000002037c32450 0 Storage is
missing
Stor_5
500708206059f880 0 Enabled
entire
New disk Ð
STEP 3.
CREATE A SIMPLE VOLUME
Use the CLI command volume create simpleto create a simple volume
from the newly inserted disk.
volume create simple –vol Simple5 –d Stor_5
STEP 4.
REPLACE FAILED VOLUME
Use the CLI command volume replaceto replace simple volume 4 which
sat on the failed disk with simple volume 5 in the mirrored volume hierarchy.
volume replace –vol Simple4 –nvol Simple5
STEP 5.
CHECK VOLUME STATUS
Use the CLI command volume showto view the volume status. Note that
Simple4 is defined as Nonfunctional while Simple5 is defined as NeedSync.
Alias
Vol Type # of Blocks Block Size State
Simple3
Simple4
Simple5
Mirror2
Simple
Simple
Simple
Mirror
1024
1024
1024
1024
512
512
512
512
Exposed
Nonfunct
NeedSync
Exposed
258
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 6.
SYNCHRONIZE MIRROR
Use the CLI command volume mirror synchto synchronize the new
volume data with its intact mirrored volume, Simple3. Once you execute this
command, the new mirrored volume will be fully functional.
volume mirror synch –src Simple3 –dst Simple5
The synchronization is finished when the volume status of Simple5 changes
from NeedSync to Exposed.
STEP 7.
REMOVE FAILED VOLUME
Use the CLI command volume remove all to remove the non-functional
virtual volume from the V-Switch database.
volume remove all –vol Simple4
STEP 8.
REMOVE FAILED DISK
Use the CLI command volume storage remove to remove the failed disk
from the V-Switch database.
storage remove –s Stor_4
Use the CLI command storage showto view the updated storage disk
table.
Table 68:
Failed Storage Disk Removed
Alias
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Subdisk
Stor_1
Stor_2
Stor_3
Stor_5
500507606058c90
0 Enabled
entire
entire
entire
entire
2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
500708206059f880 0 Enabled
Sample Configurations
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replicating Data Off-line
You have a four-disk legacy JBOD. You want to upgrade to a new JBOD
and need to replicate the contained data from the old device to the new
device as expediently as possible. None of the disks are virtualized or
exposed. You must virtualize all of the physical disks to simple volumes
with the same capacity and block size. If the new disks are larger than the
old disks, you must first create subdisks of the same capacity as the old
disks before creating simple volumes. Then replicate the data from the old
volumes to the new volumes. When the replication is complete, you are left
with two independent data copies from each original volume.
This example explains how to:
ꢁ
ꢁ
Create simple volumes.
Replicate data from one child of a mirror to the other child.
V Switch
Management
Station
Windows 2000
Microsoft
Initiator
OS3
NS3
JBOD 1
JBOD 2
Old1
Old3
Old2
New1
New 2
Old4
New3
New4
Figure 105. Replicating Data Off-line
260
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1.
ATTACH AND VIEW STORAGE DEVICES
Attach the legacy JBOD to the V-Switch and configure the storage port
communications as needed. See “Configuring the Storage Ports,” page 57.
Use the CLI command storage showto view the attached storage.
Table 69:
Legacy JBOD Disks
Alias
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Subdisk
Stor_1
Stor_2
Stor_3
Stor_4
200507606058c90
0 Enabled
entire
entire
entire
entire
2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
2000002037c32450 0 Enabled
Next, attach the new JBOD to the V-Switch and configure the storage port
communications as needed.
Use the CLI command storage showto view the attached storage. The
legacy JBOD disks are Stor_1 through Stor_4. The new JBOD disks are Stor_5
through Stor_8.
Table 70:
Legacy + New JBOD Disks
Alias
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Subdisk
Stor_1
Stor_2
Stor_3
Stor_4
Stor_5
Stor_6
Stor_7
Stor_8
200507606058c90
0 Enabled
entire
entire
entire
entire
entire
entire
entire
entire
2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
2000002037c32450 0 Enabled
500708206059f880 0 Enabled
500003504206a683 0 Enabled
500065470490f321 0 Enabled
500000024364h764 0 Enabled
STEP 2.
CREATE SIMPLE VOLUMES
Use the CLI command volume create simpleto create a simple volume
from each disk.
Use one standard for naming the legacy JBOD simple volumes and another for
naming the new JBOD simple volumes. This will provide a visual cue when it is
time to designate the source volume to replicate from.
volume create simple –vol OS1 –d Stor_1
volume create simple –vol OS2 –d Stor_2
. . .
volume create simple –vol NS3 –d Stor_7
volume create simple –vol NS4 –d Stor_8
Sample Configurations
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 3.
REPLICATE DATA
Use the CLI command volume copycreateto begin replicating the data.
The legacy volume is the source volume. The new volume is the destination
volume.
volume copy create –src OS1 –dst NS1
volume copy create –src OS2 –dst NS2
volume copy create –src OS3 –dst NS3
volume copy create –src OS4 –dst NS4
STEP 4.
CHECK REPLICATION STATUS
Use the CLI command volume mirror show to check the replication
status.
Table 71:
Replication Status
Source Destination Oper
Admin
Progress
Status
Status
NONE
OS1
OS1
NS1
OS2
NS2
OS3
NS3
OS4
NS4
synch
None
0
synch
synch
synch
synch
synch
synch
synch
dataRep
None
25
0
NONE
OS2
dataRep
None
13
0
NONE
OS3
dataRep
None
7
NONE
OS4
0
dataRep
2
The simple volumes can be exposed independently to hosts or used as
building blocks in another volume hierarchy.
262
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the V-Switch with a Single IP
Routing Path
You have just purchased a V-Switch to manage your company’s storage
network. A section of your company’s employees is located in your local
branch offices and a section is stationed in your overseas offices.
You need to configure volume access for both the local and overseas
employees.
In this example, the storage network consists of:
ꢁ
One JBOD appliance with four disks of equal capacity (the actual
capacity is not important) connected to the V-Switch.
ꢁ
One computer terminal with a network card (NIC) acting as the
management station for the V-Switch connected to the Ethernet
port Eth1 via a 1 Gbit Ethernet RJ45 cable. See #2 in Figure 106,
page 264.
ꢁ
ꢁ
One LAN connection to Ethernet port Eth2 via a 1 Gbit Ethernet
RJ45 cable. See #3 in Figure 106, page 264.
One external network connection to the LAN.
The hosts 1 and 2 run on the Windows™ 2000 platform and have the IBM
iSCSI initiator v.1.2.2 software installed.
An IP address has already been assigned to the management station.
The management port Eth 1 IP address will be assigned 100.100.100.2.
The network port Eth 2 IP address will be assigned 212.199.43.56.
The iSCSI portal for network port Eth2 will be set to 5003.
Your network should mimic Figure 106, page 264.
This example explains how to:
ꢁ
Initialize your V-Switch via the LCD display panel and control
buttons.
ꢁ
Manage your V-Switch through a direct 1 Gbit Ethernet connection
to the V-Switch Eth 1 network port.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Configure IP routing to a remote IP network.
Configure network port Eth 2 for volume exposure to hosts.
Create a RAID 10 volume.
Expose a RAID 10 volume to both local and remote hosts.
Sample Configurations
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initiator Target:
212.199.43.56
Tower box
Tower box
IP address:
10.10.1.1
10.10.0.0
Host 1
R
Network B
212.199.43.70
Host 2
IP address:
212.199.43.90
LAN A
V Switch
Management
Station
Windows 2000
1 Gbit Ethernet,
Microsoft
Initiator
RJ45 Copper
Connections
IP address:
100.100.100.1
2
3
Fibre Channel
Connection
Eth 1: 100.100.100.2
Eth 2: 212.199.43.56
1
JBOD 1
Disk 1
Disk 3
Disk 2
Disk 4
Figure 106. IP Routing Topology
264
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1.
ATTACH CABLES
Attach an HSSDC-DB9 fibre channel cable from your JBOD appliance to one of
the storage ports on the back panel of the V-Switch. See #1 in Figure 106,
page 264. Depending on your appliance, you need to plug a terminator into
one of the JBOD ports.
Attach an RJ45 copper 1 Gbit Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port Eth1 on
the front panel of the V-Switch to your management station.
STEP 2.
POWER UP STORAGE DEVICE
Power up the JBOD appliance first to allow the V-Switch to register it in its
network scan.
STEP 3.
POWER UP V-SWITCH
Connect the power cord to the V-Switch and then to the electric socket. The V-
Switch powers up. The fan assembly is running and the LCD panel displays:
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
STEP 4.
INITIALIZE V-SWITCH
Use the LCD display and control buttons to configure the V-Switch management
port IP address and mask.
Use the LCD display and control buttons on the V-Switch to configure the V-
Switch management port IP address and mask.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Toggle to the IP Configure ETH1 Port screen.
Press Enter. The IP Configuration screen appears.
IP CONFIG
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Press Enter again. The IP Config ETH1 Port screen appears.
IP Config
ETH1 Port
Press Enter. The Insert IP screen appears.
Insert IP
0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0
Enter the management port IP address. The left/right buttons toggle
between places in the IP address. The up/down buttons scroll between
numbers. Press Enter after inputting the full address.
Insert IP
1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.0 0 2
ꢁ
ꢁ
Press Enter to enter the IP address and progress to the IP Mask screen.
Mask
2 5 5.2 5 5.2 5 5.0 0 0
If you want to change from the default mask, use the left/right buttons
to toggle between places in the mask and the up/down buttons scroll
between numbers.
Sample Configurations
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
Press Enter to enter the IP mask and return to the main V-Switch
Status screen.
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
STEP 5.
LOGIN TO THE MANAGEMENT PORT
From your management terminal, open a Telnet session with the management
port.
ꢁ
ꢁ
From the Windows Start menu, select Run.
In the Open window, enter:
telnet 100.100.100.2
ꢁ
ꢁ
Click OK. A Telnet session window opens.
Press Enter on your keyboard to open the V-Switch 3000 Login window.
Figure 107. V-Switch 3000 Login Screen
ꢁ
Enter the default user name and password and press Enter on your
keyboard. The CLI prompt > appears. You are now logged in and
ready to begin configuring your V-Switch for volume virtualization and
exposure.
STEP 6.
CONFIGURE NETWORK PORT ETH 2 IP ADDRESS
Use the CLI command ip config set to configure the network port Eth 2
for communications between the V-Switch and host stations.
ip config set –if eth2 –ip 212.199.43.56 –im
255.255.255.0 –act 1
STEP 7.
CONFIGURE ISCSI PORTAL
Use the CLI command iscsi portalcreate to configure the iSCSI
portal on network port Eth 1 for iSCSI communications between the V-Switch
and the host station.
The port number you
set in the CLI must
coincide with the port
number you set in
your iSCSI initiator
configuration.
iscsi portal create –ip 212.199.43.56 –p 5003
STEP 8.
CONFIGURE IP ROUTING PATH
266
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the CLI command ip route addto create an IP routing path to the
external host network IP address from network port Eth 2. This will allow
communications between the local V-Switch and Network B’s host stations.
ip route add –dip 10.10.0.0 –dmask 255.255.255.0 –gw
212.199.43.70 –if eth2
STEP 9.
CHECK STORAGE DEVICES
Use the CLI command storage showto list the system-registered storage
devices. This ensures that all disks were registered during the disk auto-
discovery scan. This also lists the default disk aliases needed for creating your
virtual volumes.
storage show
Table 72:
Storage Disks
Alias
Entity Name
LUN Oper. Status Subdisk
Stor_1
Stor_2
Stor_3
Stor_4
500507606058c90
0 Enabled
entire
entire
entire
entire
2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
2000002037c32450 0 Enabled
STEP 10. CREATE SIMPLE VOLUMES
Use the CLI command volume create simpleto create four simple
virtual volumes – one from each physical disk.
volume create simple –vol Simple1 –d Stor_1
volume create simple –vol Simple2 –d Stor_2
volume create simple –vol Simple3 –d Stor_3
volume create simple –vol Simple4 –d Stor_4
STEP 11. CREATE MIRRORED VOLUMES (RAID 0)
Use the CLI command volume create mirrorto create a mirrored
volume, Mirror1, from simple volumes Simple1 and Simple2.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror1 –nbc 2 –ch Simple1 –ch
Simple2
Use the CLI command volume create mirror to create a mirrored
volume, Mirror2, from simple volumes Simple3 and Simple4.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror2 –nbc 2 –ch Simple3 –ch
Simple4
STEP 12. CREATE STRIPED VOLUME (RAID 1)
Sample Configurations
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the CLI command volume create striped to create a striped
volume, Stripe1.
volume create striped –vol Stripe1 –nbc 2 –sus 64 –ch
Mirror1 –ch Mirror2
STEP 13. CREATE ISCSI TARGET AND LUN
After creating the final virtual volume configuration that you want to expose to
the network hosts, you need to create an iSCSI target for the volume as well as
attach LUN0 to the target volume. Use the CLI command volume expose
-new to create the iSCSI target and attach LUN0 to the striped volume,
Stripe1.
volume expose -new –vol Stripe1 –ta storage –tn
billing.sanrad –device VSwitch
STEP 14. CONFIGURE HOST STATION INITIATOR
Open the Microsoft iSCSI initiator program on host station 1.
Figure 108. Microsoft iSCSI Initiator
Click Add from the Target Portals tab. The Add Target Portal dialog box
opens.
268
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 109. Portal Configuration
Enter the IP address of Eth1, 172.17.200.174 and select the socket for the IP
address.
Click OK. The Microsoft initiator automatically discovers all available targets for
this portal (IP + TCP).
Toggle to the Available Targets tab to view all available targets.
Figure 110. Available Target
Sample Configurations
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 15. BEGIN USING VOLUME
You can access Windows’ Disk Management application by right clicking on My
Computer and selecting Manage. Select Disk Management from the
Computer Management window.
The new disk should
be configured as a
basic disk only.
Figure 111. Disk Management Window
270
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring a Cluster
You have just purchased two V-Switches and are ready to configure your
host/storage network. Your company has one LAN for storage access and
V-Switch management connections.
Your management station IP address is 212.199.43.40.
You have one FC JBOD that contains four disks.
Because you have only one company LAN, you will be using only one
network port, Eth 2, to connect the V-Switches to the company hosts. Your
LAN mask is 212.199.43.
You have two hosts 1 and 2 with Microsoft iSCSI initiators and running on
Windows™ 2000 OS.
You will create identical V-Switch and volume configuration files for each
V-Switch, with only the V-Switch aliases being unique.
You will create two mirrored volumes, Mirror1 and Mirror2, one to be
exposed on V-Switch 1 to one host and one to be exposed on V-Switch 2 to
both hosts.
This example explains how to:
ꢁ
Initialize the V-Switches via the LCD display panel and control
buttons.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Name the V-Switches.
Identify a physical disk on multiple V-Switches.
Manage the V-Switches via terminal and Telnet session.
Configure a network port for IP takeover in the event that a
neighboring V-Switch goes offline.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Configure a cluster.
Enable host access to more than one iSCSI target.
Sample Configurations
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initiator Target:
212.199.43.56
Telnet
Station
Initiator Targets:
212.199.43.75
212.199.43.56
IP address:
212.199.43.40
Host
1
IP address:
212.199.43.50
Host
2
IP address:
212.199.43.70
Etherne
LAN B
2
2
Eth 1: 212.199.43.41
Eth 1: 212.199.43.56
V Switch 1
V Switch 2
Eth 1: 212.199.43.42
Eth 1: 212.199.43.75
Fibre Channel
Connection
1
1
JBOD 1
Disk 1
Disk 3
Disk 2
Disk 4
Figure 112. Cluster Topology
STEP 1.
ATTACH CABLES
Attach an HSSDC-DB9 fibre channel cable from your JBOD appliance to one of
the storage ports on the back panel of V-Switch 1. See #1 in Figure 112.
Depending on your appliance, you need to plug a terminator into one of the
JBOD ports.
Attach an RJ45 copper 1 Gbit Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port Eth1 on
the front panel of V-Switch 1 to your Telnet terminal. See #2 in Figure 112.
Attach another RJ45 copper 1 Gbit Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port Eth1
on the front panel of the second V-Switch, Vswitch2, to your Telnet terminal.
STEP 2.
POWER UP STORAGE DEVICE
Power up the JBOD appliance first to allow both V-Switches to register it in their
network scan.
272
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 3.
POWER UP V-SWITCHES
Connect the power cord to V-Switch 1 and then to the electric socket. The V-
Switch powers up. The fan assembly is running and the LCD panel displays:
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
Connect the power cord to V-Switch 2 and then to the electric socket. The V-
Switch powers up. The fan assembly is running and the LCD panel displays:
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
STEP 4.
INITIALIZE V-SWITCH 1
Use the LCD display and control buttons on V-Switch 1 to configure the V-
Switch management port IP address and mask.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Toggle to the IP Configure ETH1 Port screen.
Press Enter. The IP Configuration screen appears.
IP CONFIG
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Press Enter again. The IP Config ETH1 Port screen appears.
IP Config
ETH1 Port
Press Enter. The Insert IP screen appears.
Insert IP
0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0
Enter the management port IP address. The left/right buttons toggle
between places in the IP address. The up/down buttons scroll between
numbers. Press Enter after inputting the full address.
Insert IP
2 1 2.1 9 9.0 4 3.0 4 1
ꢁ
Press Enter to enter the IP address and progress to the IP Mask screen.
Mask
2 5 5.2 5 5.2 5 5.0 0 0
ꢁ
ꢁ
If you want to change from the default mask, use the left/right buttons
to toggle between places in the mask and the up/down buttons scroll
between numbers.
Press Enter to enter the IP mask and return to the main V-Switch
Status screen.
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
Sample Configurations
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 5.
INITIALIZE V-SWITCH 2
Use the LCD display and control buttons on V-Switch 2 to configure the V-
Switch management port IP address and mask.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Toggle to the IP Configure ETH1 Port screen.
Press Enter. The IP Configuration screen appears.
IP CONFIG
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Press Enter again. The IP Config ETH1 Port screen appears.
IP Config
ETH1 Port
Press Enter. The Insert IP screen appears.
Insert IP
0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0
Enter the management port IP address. The left/right buttons toggle
between places in the IP address. The up/down buttons scroll between
numbers. Press Enter after inputting the full address.
Insert IP
2 1 2.1 9 9.0 4 3.0 4 2
ꢁ
Press Enter to enter the IP address and progress to the IP Mask screen.
Mask
2 5 5.2 5 5.2 5 5.0 0 0
ꢁ
ꢁ
If you want to change from the default mask, use the left/right buttons
to toggle between places in the mask and the up/down buttons scroll
between numbers.
Press Enter to enter the IP mask and return to the main V-Switch
Status screen.
V-Switch 3000
Status: OK
STEP 6.
LOGIN TO THE V-SWITCH 1 MANAGEMENT PORT
From your management terminal, open a Telnet session with the management
port on V-Switch 1.
ꢁ
ꢁ
From the Windows Start menu, select Run.
In the Open window, enter:
telnet 212.199.43.41
ꢁ
ꢁ
Click OK. A Telnet session window opens.
Press Enter on your keyboard to open the V-Switch 3000 Login window.
274
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 113. V-Switch 3000 Login Screen
ꢁ
Enter the default user name, sanrad, and password, sanrad, and
press Enter on your keyboard. The CLI prompt > appears. You are
now logged in and ready to begin configuring your V-Switch for
volume virtualization and exposure.
STEP 7.
NAME V-SWITCH 1
Use the CLI command init to name V-Switch 1. You will need this name
later for exposing volumes.
init –n VSwitch1
STEP 8.
LOGIN TO THE V-SWITCH 2 MANAGEMENT PORT
From your management terminal, open another Telnet session, this time with
the management port on V-Switch 2.
ꢁ
ꢁ
From the Windows Start menu, select Run.
In the Open window, enter:
telnet 212.199.43.42
ꢁ
ꢁ
Click OK. A Telnet session window opens.
Press Enter on your keyboard to open the V-Switch 3000 Login window.
Figure 114. V-Switch 3000 Login Screen
ꢁ
Enter the default user name and password and press Enter on your
Sample Configurations
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
keyboard. The CLI prompt > appears. You are now logged in and
ready to begin configuring your V-Switch for volume virtualization and
exposure.
STEP 9.
NAME V-SWITCH 2
Use the CLI command initto name V-Switch 2. You will need this name later
for exposing volumes.
init –n VSwitch2
STEP 10. CREATE CLUSTER
You need to enable your two V-Switches to act as one unit to provide V-Switch
failover. To do this, you need to tell each one that the other one exists. Use
the CLI command neighbor add to tell each V-Switch that it has a
neighbor.
To V-Switch 1, add V-Switch 2 as a neighbor.
neighbor add –nb VSwitch2 –ip 212.199.43.42
To V-Switch 2, add V-Switch 1 as a neighbor.
neighbor add –nb VSwitch1 –ip 212.199.43.41
STEP 11. CONFIGURE V-SWITCH 1 NETWORK PORT ETH 1 IP ADDRESSES
Use the CLI command ip config set to configure the network port Eth 1
for communications between VSwitch1 and the host stations on VSwitch1. Set
the IP address as active (1) to allow read/write commands to pass through this
IP address.
ip config set –if eth1 -ip 212.199.43.56 –im
255.255.255.0 –act 1
Now, use the CLI command ip config setto configure the IP takeover
address for Eth 1. This IP address will be the IP address of Eth 1 on VSwitch2.
The address will sit inactive (2) unless VSwitch2 goes offline. Then VSwitch1
will activate (1) this address and direct all read/write commands to this address
through Eth1 on VSwitch1.
ip config set –if eth1 -ip 212.199.43.75 –im
255.255.255.0 –act 2
STEP 12. CONFIGURE V-SWITCH 1 ISCSI PORTALS
Use the CLI command iscsi portalcreate to configure the iSCSI
portal on network port Eth 2 for iSCSI communications between VSwitch1 and
the host stations.
The port number you
set in the CLI must
coincide with the port
number you set in
your iSCSI initiator
configuration.
iscsi portal create –ip 212.199.43.56 –p 5003
276
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the CLI command again to configure the iSCSI portal for the inactive IP
address on Eth 2 to allow iSCSI communications via this IP on VSwitch1 in the
event of VSwitch2 failover.
iscsi portal create –ip 212.199.43.75 –p 5003
STEP 13. CONFIGURE V-SWITCH 2 NETWORK PORT ETH 1 IP ADDRESSES
Use the CLI command ip config set to configure the network port Eth 1
for communications between VSwitch2 and the host stations on VSwitch2. Set
the IP address as active (1) to allow read/write commands to pass through this
IP address.
ip config set –if eth1 -ip 212.199.43.75 –im
255.255.255.0 –act 1
Now, use the CLI command ip config setto configure the IP takeover
address for Eth 1. This IP address will be the IP address of Eth 1 on VSwitch1.
The address will sit inactive (2) unless V-Switch 1 goes offline. Then VSwitch2
will activate (1) this address and direct all read/write commands to this address
through Eth 1 on VSwitch2.
ip config set –if eth1 -ip 212.199.43.56 –im
255.255.255.0 –act 2
STEP 14. CONFIGURE V-SWITCH 2 ISCSI PORTALS
Use the CLI command iscsi portalcreate to configure the iSCSI
portal on network port Eth 1 for iSCSI communications between the V-Switch
and the host stations.
The port number you
set in the CLI must
coincide with the port
number you set in
your iSCSI initiator
configuration.
iscsi portal create –ip 212.199.43.75 –p 5003
Use the CLI command again to configure the iSCSI portal for the inactive IP
address on Eth 1 to allow iSCSI communications via this IP on VSwitch2 in the
event of VSwitch1 failover.
iscsi portal create –ip 212.199.43.56 –p 5003
STEP 15. CHECK STORAGE DEVICES
Use the CLI command storage showto list the system-registered storage
devices on VSwitch1. This ensures that all disks were registered during the disk
auto-discovery scan. This also lists the default disk aliases needed for creating
your simple volumes.
Sample Configurations
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
storage show
Table 73:
Storage Disks as seen through V-Switch 1
Entity Name LUN Oper. Status Subdisk
Alias
Use the unique disk
entity names (WWUIs)
and NOT the default
disk aliases to
duplicate virtual
volume hierarchies in
each V-Switch.
Stor_1 2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
Stor_2 500507606058c90 0 Enabled
entire
entire
entire
entire
Stor_3 2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
Stor_4 2000002037c32450 0 Enabled
Use the CLI command storage showto list the system-registered storage
devices on VSwitch2. This ensures that all disks were registered during the disk
auto-discovery scan. This also lists the default disk aliases needed for creating
your simple volumes.
storage show
Table 74:
Storage Disks as seen through V-Switch 2
Entity Name LUN Oper. Status Subdisk
Alias
Use the unique disk
entity names (WWUIs)
and NOT the default
disk aliases to
duplicate virtual
volume hierarchies in
Stor_1 5005076006058c90 0 Enabled
Stor_2 2000002037f88fb8 0 Enabled
Stor_3 2000002037c32b1f 0 Enabled
Stor_4 2000002037c32450 0 Enabled
entire
entire
entire
entire
each V-Switch.
Compare this disk table with the disk table from VSwitch1. Note that Default
storage 1 and 2 are reversed in the disk table from VSwitch2. That is, Default
storage 1 in VSwitch1 is listed as Default storage 2 in VSwitch2. You will use
the WWUIs to duplicate virtual volume hierarchies in each V-Switch.
STEP 16. CREATE SIMPLE VOLUMES ON V-SWITCH 1
Use the CLI command volume create simpleto create four simple
virtual volumes – one from each physical disk.
volume create simple –vol Simple1 –d Stor_1
volume create simple –vol Simple2 –d Stor_2
volume create simple –vol Simple3 –d Stor_3
volume create simple –vol Simple4 –d Stor_4
STEP 17. CREATE MIRRORED VOLUMES (RAID 0)
Use the CLI command volume create mirrorto create a mirrored
volume, Mirror1, from simple volumes Simple1 and Simple2.
278
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror1 –nbc 2 –ch Simple1 –ch
Simple2
Use the CLI command volume create mirror to create a mirrored
volume, Mirror2, from simple volumes Simple3 and Simple4.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror2 –nbc 2 –ch Simple3 –ch
Simple4
STEP 18. CREATE ISCSI TARGET AND LUN
After creating the final virtual volume that you want to expose to the network host,
you need to create an iSCSI target for the volumes as well as attach LUN0 to each
target volume. Use the CLI command volume expose -newto create each
iSCSI target and attach LUN0 to each mirrored volume, Mirror1 and Mirror2.
volume expose -new –vol Mirror1 –ta billing –tn
billing.sanrad –device VSwitch1
volume expose -new –vol Mirror2 –ta musicbox –tn
musicbox.sanrad –device VSwitch2
STEP 19. CREATE SIMPLE VOLUMES ON V-SWITCH 2
Now you will repeat the volume configurations on VSwitch2 to mimic the
configurations on VSwtich1. Use the CLI command volume create
simpleto create four simple virtual volumes – one from each physical disk.
Note that, using the WWUI to identify each disk, Simple1 is built on default
storage 2 and Simple 2 is built on default storage 1.
volume create simple –vol Simple1 –d Stor_2
volume create simple –vol Simple2 –d Stor_1
volume create simple –vol Simple3 –d Stor_3
volume create simple –vol Simple4 –d Stor_4
STEP 20. CREATE MIRRORED VOLUMES (RAID 0)
Use the CLI command volume create mirrorto create a mirrored
volume, Mirror1, from simple volumes Simple1 and Simple2.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror1 –nbc 2 –ch Simple1 –ch
Simple2
Use the CLI command volume create mirror to create a mirrored
volume, Mirror2, from simple volumes Simple3 and Simple4.
volume create mirror –vol Mirror2 –nbc 2 –ch Simple3 –ch
Simple4
Sample Configurations
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 21. CREATE ISCSI TARGET AND LUN
After creating the final virtual volume that you want to expose to the network host,
you need to create an iSCSI target for the volumes as well as attach LUN0 to each
target volume. Use the CLI command volume expose -newto create each
iSCSI target and attach LUN0 to each mirrored volume, Mirror1 and Mirror2.
volume expose -new –vol Mirror1 –ta billing –tn sanrad.
billing –device VSwitch1
volume expose -new –vol Mirror2 –ta musicbox –tn sanrad.
musicbox –device VSwitch2
STEP 22. CONFIGURE HOST STATION 1 INITIATOR
Open the Microsoft iSCSI initiator program on host station 1.
Figure 115. Microsoft iSCSI Initiator
Click Add from the Target Portals tab. The Add Target Portal dialog box
opens.
280
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 116. Portal Configuration
Enter the IP address of Eth1, 212.199.43.56 and select the socket for the IP
address.
Click OK. The Microsoft initiator automatically discovers all available targets for
this portal (IP + TCP).
Toggle to the Available Targets tab to view all available targets for the
configured portal.
Figure 117. Available Target
Sample Configurations
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 23. CONFIGURE HOST STATION 2 INITIATOR
Open the Microsoft iSCSI initiator program on host station 2.
Figure 118. Microsoft iSCSI Initiator
Click Add from the Target Portals tab. The Add Target Portal dialog box
opens.
Figure 119. Portal Configuration
Enter the IP address of Eth1, 212.199.43.56 and select the socket for the IP
address.
Click OK. The Microsoft initiator automatically discovers all available targets for
this portal (IP + TCP).
Toggle to the Available Targets tab to view all available targets for the
configured portal.
282
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 120. Available Target
Sample Configurations
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because host 2 has access to two targets, you need to add the second initiator
to access the target, sanrad.musicbox.
Figure 121. 2nd Microsoft iSCSI Initiator Configuration for Host
Station 2
Toggle to the Available Targets tab to view all available targets for the host 2
initiator.
Figure 122. All Available Targets
284
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Index
acl identity srp.........................240
admin............................... 55, 199
IP route .....................67, 180, 207
iSNS................................. 63, 174
mirror.....................................229
neighbor ........................... 76, 209
RADIUS .......................... 129, 242
SNMP manager .................. 54, 204
user profile..............................175
1
10/100 ...............................19
A
AC power supplies..............186
ACL
Add name
acl identity ..............................239
add ........................................236
details ....................................236
down......................................241
identity add chap .....................239
identity add name....................239
identity add srp .......................240
identity create .........................238
identity delete .........................238
identity details................. 128, 238
identity remove chap................240
identity remove name...............239
identity remove srp..................240
identity set..............................241
remove...................................237
set .........................................237
show ....................... 117, 235, 237
up..........................................241
Admin
add ................................ 175, 199
password ........................ 175, 199
remove........................... 175, 199
show ......................................198
Alias
disk........................................217
iSCSI target ............................234
storage...................................217
subdisk............................. 90, 221
volume ......................93, 162, 223
Auto-discovery............... 28, 38
B
Blink
Actual capacity .......... 153, 158
storage abort..................... 86, 216
storage activate................. 85, 216
Add
acl .........................................236
acl identity chap ......................239
Boot.................................213
285
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Break
Create
mirror............................. 150, 229
acl identity ..............................238
concatenated volume.......... 95, 224
iSCSI portal....................... 64, 233
iSCSI target ............................234
mirrored volume ......................224
RAID 0+1................................106
simple volume ................... 93, 223
snapshot.................................146
stripe volume .................... 97, 225
subdisk............................. 90, 219
transparent volume..................224
volume copy............................262
volume mirror..........................100
volume RAID 0+1 ....................103
volume RAID 10.......................103
volume simple .......................... 93
Bridging switch ....................16
Bus ID ........................ 57, 204
C
Capacity
actual............................. 153, 158
potential ......................... 153, 158
Change
password ................................175
user profile..............................175
CHAP
add acl identity........................239
remove identity .......................240
Cube ................................153
Chassis.........................22, 34
Check
D
IP route ....................................68
CLI............................. 19, 195
Data replication . 102, 140, 260,
262
Database
Cluster................................72
configuration................69, 79, 271
failover disable ...........79, 185, 211
failover enable............79, 185, 211
set ............................82, 185, 211
show ................................ 78, 210
Command Line Interface.......19
Community .........................55
Compact Flash Slot...............42
corrupted........................ 192, 213
download ........................ 177, 212
export............................. 192, 213
upload ............................ 176, 212
Dead interval............... 78, 211
Default
gateway................................... 67
Concatenated
Default factory database .....191
volume ...................................224
Default factory system........191
Configure
Delete
cluster.........................69, 79, 271
console............................. 49, 177
IP routing..................................66
IP set .....................................251
iSCSI................................ 64, 108
network ports............................60
storage port ..............................57
V-Switch cluster.........................75
V-Switch single IP....................263
V-Switch via console .......... 49, 177
V-Switch via LCD .......................48
acl identity ..............................238
iSNS..........................64, 168, 174
RADIUS ..................................168
Details
acl..........................................236
disk.................................. 87, 218
interface .................................203
iSCSI target ............................117
LU..........................................245
LUN........................................245
neighbor ........................... 80, 210
storage............................. 87, 218
subdisk.................................... 91
subdisks..................................220
Console.............................249
config............................... 49, 177
Console port..................30, 40
Corrupted database............191
286
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
volume ...................................222
interface show ................... 58, 201
node show......................... 59, 202
point-to-point ........................... 58
port type.................................. 58
private loop.............................. 58
public loop ............................... 58
set .......................................... 58
set speed ................................202
Device
set ..........46, 52, 75, 170, 182, 200
set Telnet...................54, 171, 201
Disable
cluster failover............79, 185, 211
Discover
storage...................................216
File transfer
Discover LUNs ........... 181, 201
Disk
show ......................................212
FT
alias.......................................217
details .............................. 87, 218
remove........................... 183, 219
set ................................... 86, 217
show ....................... 217, 258, 261
download ........................ 177, 212
export problem ........................213
show ......................................212
update....................................187
upload ....................................176
upload software .......................212
Disk failure........................227
Down
acl .........................................241
identity...................................241
H
Download
Hierarchy
volume ...................................223
Hot keys ..................... 19, 196
software ......................... 177, 212
Dummy synchronize
volume mirror ................. 166, 227
E
I
Enable
Identify
cluster failover............79, 185, 211
storage device ................... 85, 216
Expand volume.......... 158, 230
Identity
acl add chap............................239
acl add name...........................239
acl remove name .....................239
add srp...................................240
create acl................................238
delete acl ................................238
details ............................ 128, 238
down ......................................241
remove chap ...........................240
remove srp..............................240
set .........................................241
up..........................................241
Export
corrupted database .......... 192, 213
problem.......................... 192, 213
Expose
new volume ............................243
volume .................... 134, 232, 243
F
Fabric .................................58
Failover..................... 166, 227
cluster.......................79, 185, 211
disable.......................79, 185, 211
enable .......................79, 185, 211
In-band ..............................46
Info....................................53
V switch..................................200
V-Switch .................................171
FC
init...................................46
connection mode........................58
fabric........................................58
Init.....................................51
V-Switch .................................198
Index
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
show ................................ 65, 233
iSCSI target
Initiate
V-Switch.................................251
alias .......................................234
create.....................................234
details ....................................117
remove........................... 168, 235
set ................................. 167, 235
show ......................................233
Interface
details ....................................203
set ................................. 178, 203
show ................................ 57, 202
show fc...................................201
Internet Storage Name Service
............................... 63, 174
iSNS........................... 63, 174
Interval
dead.........................................78
keep alive .................................78
suspicious.................................78
K
Keep alive interval........ 78, 211
Keep alive parameters........210
Keep alive signal..................78
Key ...........................129, 242
IP
active.......................................73
configuration set......................251
inactive.....................................73
neighbor...................................73
RADIUS add .................... 129, 242
radius remove .........................243
RADIUS set .............................242
radius show..................... 131, 242
L
Last good configuration.......190
LCD.....................42, 190, 250
LED.............................. 23, 35
GB indicator ........................31, 44
network port........................29, 39
power indicator....................31, 44
Load threshold...................145
Logical Unit Number ...........108
LU
IP config
remove......................62, 179, 206
set ...........................................60
show ........................................61
IP configuration
set ................................. 178, 206
show ......................................206
IP route
add ...........................67, 180, 207
config.......................................66
default......................................67
remove......................69, 180, 208
show ................................ 68, 207
details ....................................245
remove........................... 167, 245
show ......................................244
LUN..................................108
carving ...............................16, 90
details ....................................245
remove...................................245
remove...................................167
show ......................................244
iSCSI
alias target..............................234
create target ...........................234
portal create............................233
portal remove..........................233
portal show .............................252
remove target .........................235
set target................................235
show portal .............................233
show target.............................233
target details...........................117
LUNs discovery ...........181, 201
M
Management .......................41
port......................................... 41
Management Station
iSCSI portal
create.......................................64
remove...................................233
ping from V-Switch.................... 68
288
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIB....................................20
Mirror
P
add ........................................229
add volume.............................142
break ............................. 150, 229
dummy synchonize volume 166, 227
synchonize volume...................227
volume ...................................224
volume show................... 143, 227
Panel
back........................................ 34
back 2000................................ 23
front........................................ 34
front 2000................................ 22
Parallel SCSI bus ID ..... 57, 204
Password ..........................174
Ping....................................68
Mirrored volume
replace ...................................256
Mounting.......................25, 36
Port
10/100 ...............................29, 40
console........................30, 40, 249
copper ................................29, 39
FC......................................27, 37
fiber optic................................. 39
management ............................ 41
network ..............................30, 40
RJ45...................................29, 39
RS232 ................................30, 40
Scalability ................................ 43
SCSI...................................27, 37
Telnet.....................................171
N
N Port.................................58
Name
acl identity remove ..................239
Neighbor
add .................................. 76, 209
details .............................. 80, 210
remove......................81, 184, 210
set ............................81, 184, 209
show ................................ 80, 209
Potential capacity...............153
Power supply.....................186
Private Loop ........................58
Protocol bridging..................16
Network port .................29, 39
config.......................................60
Network topology.................17
PSCSI
New
set ................................... 58, 204
show ................................ 57, 203
volume expose ........................243
Node
Public Loop..........................58
show fc...................................202
Normal mode.....................190
Number of children...............95
R
RADIUS
O
add ................................ 129, 242
key................................. 129, 242
remove...................................243
set .........................................242
show .............................. 131, 242
Off-line ....................... 79, 185
On-line .............................185
On-line copy......................141
On-line replication...... 102, 140
Optical transceiver ...............39
Out-of-band ........................46
Read community..................55
Remove
acl..........................................237
acl identity chap.......................240
acl identity name .....................239
admin.....................................199
all volume ...............................226
Index
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
all volumes..............................164
disk................................ 183, 219
IP config ...................................62
IP configuration ............... 179, 206
IP route .....................69, 180, 208
iSCSI portal.............................233
iSCSI target .................... 168, 235
lu 167
LU..........................................245
LUN........................................245
neighbor....................81, 184, 210
radius.....................................243
SNMP manager................ 173, 205
srp identity..............................240
storage........................... 183, 219
subdisk........................... 183, 221
user profile..............................175
volume ........................... 162, 226
acl..........................................237
cluster .......................82, 185, 211
device...........52, 75, 170, 182, 200
disk.................................. 86, 217
FC connection mode .................. 58
FC port type ............................. 58
fc speed..................................202
FC speed.................................. 58
identity...................................241
interface ......................... 178, 203
IP configuration ...60, 178, 206, 251
iSCSI target .................... 167, 235
neighbor ....................81, 184, 209
pscsi bus ID ............................. 57
RADIUS ..................................242
SNMP manager ................ 173, 205
srp identity..............................241
storage......................86, 182, 218
subdisk........................... 183, 221
Telnet...................................... 54
volume ........................... 162, 225
Remove all
volume ...................................226
Rename
SFP ....................................39
volume ...................................162
Show
Replace
acl...........................117, 235, 237
admin.....................................198
cluster .............................. 78, 210
disk........................................217
fc interface........................ 58, 201
fc node ............................. 59, 202
file transfer .............................212
interface ........................... 57, 202
IP configuration ................. 61, 206
IP route ............................ 68, 207
iSCSI portal................65, 233, 252
iSCSI target ............................233
LU..........................................244
LUN........................................244
neighbor ........................... 80, 209
pscsi................................. 57, 203
snapshot.................................149
SNMP manager ........................204
storage...................................252
storage............................. 85, 216
subdisk............................. 91, 220
system....................................214
volume ........................89, 94, 221
volume mirror.................. 143, 227
mirrored volume......................256
power supply...........................186
volume ........................... 165, 227
Replicate...........................262
Replicating data off-line .....102,
140, 260
Replication status...............262
Report LUNs.............. 181, 201
Reset.......................... 22, 187
V switch..................................200
V-Switch.................................176
Resize volume ........... 153, 229
Retract volume .......... 157, 230
RJ45.................................249
RS232 ........... 19, 46, 190, 249
S
Safe mode.........................190
Safe Mode.........................213
SCSI bus ID ................ 57, 204
Service Agent ......................63
Service Location Protocol ......63
Set
Simple
volume ...................................223
Simple volume
create...................................... 93
290
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
show ......................................214
System boot......................213
SLP ....................................63
Snapshot ..........................144
show ......................................149
SNMP .................................20
manager add..................... 54, 204
manager remove ............. 173, 205
manager set.................... 173, 205
manager show.........................204
T
Target
authentication..........................125
existing...................................134
new........................................134
Software
download........................ 177, 212
update....................................187
upload....................................212
Technical assistance .............20
Telnet.......... 19, 46, 50, 52, 54
set device ....................... 171, 201
Telnet port ........................171
Transparent
volume ...................................224
Trap ...................................55
Speed
fc set......................................202
set fc......................................202
SRP
add identity.............................240
remove identity .......................240
Storage
U
blink abort ........................ 86, 216
blink activate..................... 85, 216
details .............................. 87, 218
discovery ................................216
disk set............................. 86, 217
disk show................................217
remove........................... 183, 219
set ............................86, 182, 218
show .........................85, 216, 252
Up
acl..........................................241
identity...................................241
UPD port.............................54
Update
software..................................187
Upload
Storage is missing..............219
software.......................... 176, 212
Storage port..................27, 37
configure ..................................57
FC speed...................................58
SCSI bus ID ...................... 57, 204
User name ........................174
User password...................174
User profile .......................174
add ........................................175
Striped
volume ...................................225
Subdisk
V
alias................................. 90, 221
create............................... 90, 219
details ......................................91
length.......................................90
remove........................... 183, 221
set ................................. 183, 221
show ................................ 91, 220
V switch
reset ......................................200
V Switch
configuration ...........................197
V Switch configuration........197
View
Subdisks
details ....................................220
iSNS........................................ 63
snapshot.................................149
Suspicious interval ....... 78, 211
Volume
Synchronize
volume mirror ...102, 140, 166, 227
System
add mirror...............................229
alias ..........................93, 162, 223
Index
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
break mirror............................229
concatenated..................... 95, 224
copy create .............................262
create.......................................88
create activate snapshot...........146
create simple................... 258, 261
details ....................................222
expand ........................... 159, 230
expose..................... 134, 232, 243
expose new.............................243
hierarchy ................................223
mirror............................. 100, 224
mirror add....................... 142, 229
mirror break.................... 152, 229
mirror dummy synchonize. 166, 227
mirror show.............. 143, 227, 262
mirror synchonize ....................227
mirror synchronize .... 102, 140, 166
number of children.....................95
on-line copy ............................142
RAID 0+1 ...............................103
RAID 10..................................103
remove........................... 162, 226
remove all...............................164
rename...................................162
replace .................... 165, 227, 258
replace mirrored ....... 166, 226, 256
resize ............................. 156, 229
retract............................ 157, 230
set ................................. 162, 225
show ...........................89, 94, 221
simple .............................. 93, 223
snapshot list............................150
snapshot show.........................149
stripe ............................... 97, 225
transparent .............................224
Volume configuration..........215
Volume create
concatenated..................... 95, 224
mirror............................. 100, 224
RAID 0+1................................103
RAID 10..................................103
simple ....................................223
stripe................................ 97, 225
transparent ....................... 88, 224
V-Switch.............................16
configuration single IP ..............263
init .........................................198
initiate....................................251
install .....................................249
management ............................ 46
reset ......................................176
use.........................................249
V-Switch cluster
configuring............................... 75
W
World Wide Node Name ........59
World Wide Port Name.. 58, 201
World Wide Unique Identifier108
Write cache
enable .............................. 86, 217
Write community .................55
Write-protected ........... 87, 218
WWNN................................59
WWPN ........................ 58, 201
WWUI...............................108
292
SANRAD V-Switch User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|